FI Material 2 NEW

SAP FI/CO – FI Material

Version ECC 6.0

SAP FI-6.0 BY MAHESH JAVAJEE

RELIANCE

TECHNOLOGIES

MANOJ XEROX Gayarti nager,Behind-Huda-Ameer pet SOFT WARE INSTITUTES MATERIAL AVAILABLE

CELL :8978989710 -1-


Version ECC 6.0

-2-


Version ECC 6.0 ERP stands for Enterprise Resource Planning. ERP is a way to integrate the data and processes of an organization into one single system. Usually ERP systems will have many components including hardware and software, in order to achieve integration, most ERP systems use a unified database to store data for various functions found throughout the organization. The ERP solutions seek to streamline and integrate operation processes and information flows in the company to synergies the resources of an organization namely men, material, money and machine through information. Initially implementation of an ERP package was possible only for very large Multi National Companies and Infrastructure Companies due to high cost involved. Integration is an extremely important part to ERP's. ERP's main goal is to integrate data and processes from all areas of an organization and unify it for easy access and work flow. ERP's usually accomplish integration by creating one single database that employs multiple software modules providing different areas of an organization with various business functions. Components of ERP To enable the easy handling of the system the ERP has been divided into the following Core subsystems: •

Sales and Marketing

•

Master Scheduling

•

Material Requirement Planning

•

Capacity Requirement Planning

•

Bill of Materials

•

Purchasing

•

Shop floor control

•

Accounts Payable/Receivable

•

Logistics

•

Asset Management

•

Financial Accounting

An ideal ERP system is when a single database is utilized and contains all data for various software modules. These software modules can include: Manufacturing: Some of the functions include; engineering, capacity, workflow management, quality control, bills of material, manufacturing process, etc. Financials: Accounts payable, accounts receivable, fixed assets, general ledger and cash management, etc. Human Resources: Benefits, training, payroll, time and attendance, etc Supply Chain Management: Inventory, supply chain planning, supplier scheduling, claim processing, order entry, purchasing, etc. Projects: Costing, billing, activity management, time and expense, etc. Customer Relationship Management: sales and marketing, service, commissions, customer contact, calls center support, etc.

-3-


Version ECC 6.0 Data Warehouse: Usually this is a module that can be accessed by an organizations customers, suppliers and employees.

Features of ERP Some of the major features of ERP and what ERP can do for the business system are as below: • • • • • • • • •

ERP facilitates company-wide Integrated Information System covering all functional areas like Manufacturing, Selling and distribution, Payables, Receivables, Inventory, Accounts, Human resources, Purchases etc., ERP performs core Corporate activities and increases customer service and thereby augmenting the Corporate Image. ERP bridges the information gap across the organisation. ERP provides for complete integration of Systems not only across the departments in a company but also across the companies under the same management. ERP is the only solution for better Project Management. ERP allows automatic introduction of latest technologies like Electronic Fund Transfer(EFT), Electronic Data Interchange(EDI), Internet, Intranet, Video conferencing, E-Commerce etc. ERP eliminates the most of the business problems like Material shortages, Productivity enhancements, Customer service, Cash Management, Inventory problems, Quality problems, Prompt delivery etc., ERP not only addresses the current requirements of the company but also provides the opportunity of continually improving and refining business processes. ERP provides business intelligence tools like Decision Support Systems (DSS), Executive Information System (EIS), Reporting, Data Mining and Early Warning Systems (Robots) for enabling people to make better decisions and thus improve their business processes

Benefits of ERP The benefits accruing to any business enterprise on account of implementing are unlimited. According to the companies like NIKE, DHL, Tektronix, Fujitsu, Millipore, Sun Microsystems, following are some of the benefits they achieved by implementing ERP packages: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Gives Accounts Payable personnel increased control of invoicing and payment processing and thereby boosting their productivity and eliminating their reliance on computer personnel for these operations. Reduce paper documents by providing on-line formats for quickly entering and retrieving information. Improves timeliness of information by permitting, posting daily instead of monthly. Greater accuracy of information with detailed content, better presentation, fully satisfactory for the Auditors. Improved Cost Control Faster response and follow up on customers More efficient cash collection, say, material reduction in delay in payments by customers. Better monitoring and quicker resolution of queries. Enables quick response to change in business operations and market conditions. Helps to achieve competitive advantage by improving its business process. Improves supply-demand linkage with remote locations and branches in different countries. Provides a unified customer database usable by all applications. Improves International operations by supporting a variety of tax structures, invoicing schemes, multiple currencies, multiple period accounting and languages. Improves information access and management throughout the enterprise. Provides solution for problems like Y2K and Single Monitory Unit(SMU) or Euro Currency.

Implementation of ERP

-4-


Version ECC 6.0 Implementing an ERP package has to be done on a phased manner. Step by step method of implementing will yield a better result than big-bang introduction. The total time required for successfully implementing an ERP package will be anything between 18 and 24 months. The normal steps involved in implementation of an ERP are as below: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Project Planning Business & Operational analysis including Gap analysis Business Process Reengineering Installation and configuration Project team training Business Requirement mapping Module configuration System interfaces Data conversion Custom Documentation End user training Acceptance testing Post implementation/Audit support

Suppliers of ERP There are many numbers of ERP suppliers who are very active in the market. Some of the companies offering renowned international ERP products include: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Baan CODA D&B IBM JD Edwards Marcarn Oracle Peoplesoft Platinum Ramco SAP SMI Software 2000

-5-


Version ECC 6.0

-6-


Version ECC 6.0 About SAP In 1972, five former IBM employees -- Dietmar Hopp, Hans-Werner Hector, Hasso Plattner, Klaus Tschira, and Claus Wellenreuther -- launch a company called Systems, Applications, and Products in Data Processing in Mannheim, Germany. Their vision: to develop standard application software for real-time business processing. The original name for SAP was German: Systeme, Anwendungen, Produkte, and German for "Systems Applications and Products." The original SAP idea was to provide customers with the ability to interact with a common corporate database for a comprehensive range of applications. Gradually, the applications have been assembled and today many corporations, including IBM and Microsoft, are using SAP products to run their own businesses. SAP applications, built around their latest R/3 system, provide the capability to manage financial, asset, and cost accounting, production operations and materials, personnel, plants, and archived documents. The R/3 system runs on a number of platforms including Windows 2000 and uses the client/server model. The latest version of R/3 includes a comprehensive Internet-enabled package. The 1980s: Rapid Growth SAP moves into the company's first building on Max-Planck-Strasse in an industrial park in Walldorf, near Heidelberg. Our software development area and its 50 terminals are all now under one roof. Fifty of the 100 largest German industrial firms are already SAP customers. The SAP R/2 system attains the high level of stability of the previous generation of programs. Keeping in mind its multinational customers, SAP designs SAP R/2 to handle different languages and currencies. With this and other innovations in SAP R/2, SAP sees rapid growth. By the middle of the decade, SAP founds its first sales organization outside Germany, in Austria. The company makes its first appearance at the CeBIT computer fair in Hanover, Germany. Revenues reach DM 100 million (around $52 million), earlier than expected. In August 1988, SAP GmbH becomes SAP AG. Starting on November 4, 1.2 million shares are listed on the Frankfurt and Stuttgart stock exchanges. Germany's renowned business journal, manager magazine, names SAP its Company of the Year -- a distinction we would receive twice more in the next few years. With the founding of subsidiaries in Denmark, Sweden, Italy, and the United States, SAP's international expansion takes a leap forward. The 1990s: A New Approach to Software and Solutions SAP R/3 is unleashed on the market. The client-server concept, uniform appearance of graphical interfaces, consistent use of relational databases, and the ability to run on computers from different vendors meets with overwhelming approval. With SAP R/3, SAP ushers in a new generation of enterprise software -- from mainframe computing to the three-tier architecture of database, application, and user interface. To this day, the client-server architecture is the standard in business software. A growing number of subsidiaries are managed out of Walldorf. The new Sales and Development Center in Walldorf officially opens it doors. It symbolizes the global success of the company. In our twentieth year, our business outside Germany exceeds 50 percent of total sales for the first time. By 1996, the company has earned 1,089 new SAP R/3 customers. At the end of the year, SAP R/3 has been installed in more than 9,000 systems worldwide.

-7-


Version ECC 6.0 SAP celebrates its twenty-fifth anniversary in 1997 and now employs approximately 12,900 people. We continue to strengthen our industry focus and build more and more industry-specific solutions. Henning Kagermann becomes CoChairman and CEO of SAP AG with Hasso Plattner. On August 3, 1998, the letters S-A-P appear for the first time on the Big Board at the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), the largest stock exchange in the world. As the decade draws to a close, Hasso Plattner, Co-Founder, Co-Chairman, and CEO announces the mySAP.com strategy, heralding the beginning of a new direction for the company and our product portfolio. mySAP.com links ecommerce solutions to existing ERP applications, using state-of-the-art Web technology. The 2000s: Innovation for the New Millennium With the Internet, the user becomes the focus of software applications. SAP develops SAP Workplace and paves the way for the idea of an enterprise portal and role-specific access to information. Currently, more than 12 million users work each day with SAP solutions. There are now 121,000 installations worldwide, more than 1,500 SAP partners, over 25 industry-specific business solutions, and more than 41,200 customers in 120 countries. SAP is the world's third-largest independent software vendor. SAP are categorized into 3 core functional areas: Logistics • • • • • •

Sales and Distribution (SD) Material Management (MM) Warehouse Management (WM) Production Planning (PP) General Logistics (LO) Quality Management (QM)

Financial • • • • •

Financial Accounting (FI) Controlling (CO) Enterprise Controlling (EC) Investment Management (IM) Treasury (TR)

Human Resources • •

Personnel Administration (PA) Personnel Development (PD)

-8-


Version ECC 6.0

-9-


Version ECC 6.0 System Landscape Landscape is like a server system or like a layout of the servers or some may even call it the architecture of the server’s viz. SAP is divided into three different landscapes: • • •

DEV (DEVELOPMENT SERVER) QAS (QUALITY SERVER) PROD (PRODUCTION SERVER)

- DEV would have multiple clients for ex: 190- Sandbox, 100- Golden, 180- Unit Test. - QAS may again have multiple clients for ex: 300- Integration Test, 700 to 710 Training. - PROD may have something like a 200 Production. These names and numbers are the implementer's discreet on how they want it or they have been using in their previous implementations or how is the client's business scenario. Now whatever you do in the Sandbox doesn't affect the other servers or clients. Whenever you think you are satisfied with your configuration and you think you can use it moving forward, you RE-DO it in the golden client (remember, this is a very neat and clean client and you cannot use it for rough usage). As you re-do everything that you had thought was important and usable, you get a transport request pop up upon saving every time. You save it under a transport request and give your description to it. Thus the configuration is transported to the Unit Test client (180 in this example). You don't run any transaction or even use the SAP Easy Access screen on the 100 (golden) clients. This is a configuration only client. Now upon a successful transport by the Basis guy, you have the entire configuration in the Testing client, just as it is in the Golden client. The configuration remains in sync between these two clients. But in the Testing client you can not even access SPRO (Display IMG) screen. It's a transaction only client where you perform the unit test. Upon a satisfactory unit test, you move the good configuration to the next SERVER (DEV). The incorrect or unsatisfactory configuration is corrected in Golden (may again as well be practiced in the sandbox prior to Golden) and accordingly transported back to 180 (Unit Test) until the unit test affected by that particular config is satisfactory. The Golden client remains the 'database' (if you want to call it that) or you may rather call it the 'ultimate' reference client for the entire good, complete and final configuration that is being used in the implementation. In summary: Landscape: is the arrangement for the servers IDES: is purely for education purpose and is NOT INCLUDED in the landscape. DEVELOPMENT ---> QUALITY ----> PRODUCTION DEVELOPMENT: is where the consultants do the customization as per the company's requirement. QUALITY: is where the core team members and other members test the customization. PRODUCTION: is where the live data of the company is recorded.

- 10 -


Version ECC 6.0 A request will flow from Dev->Quall->Prod and not backwards. 1. Sandbox server: In the initial stages of any implementation project, You are given a sandbox server where you do all the configuration/customization as per the companies business process. 2. Development Server: - Once the BBP gets signed off, the configuration is done is development server and saved in workbench requests, to be transported to Production server. 3. Production Server: This is the last/ most refined client where the user will work after project GO LIVE. Any changes/ new development is done is development client and the request is transported to production. These three are landscape of any Company. They organized their office in these three ways. Developers develop their program in Development server and then transport it to test server. In testing server tester check/test the program and then transport it to Production Server. Later it will deploy to client from production server. Presentation Server- Where SAP GUI has. Application Server - Where SAP Installed. Database Server - Where Database installed.

System Landscape DEV Manage master configuration

QAS

CUST

Write ABAP program Test data

DEVL

Unit test

UTST

PRD transport

transport

QTST Quality Testing

TRAN Training client

SAND

Common Shared Directory

- 11 -

PROD


Version ECC 6.0

- 12 -


Version ECC 6.0 What R/3 in SAP What is the meaning of "R" in R/3 systems? R/3 stands for real-time three tier architecture. This is the kind of architecture SAP R/3 system has. R/3 means three layers are installed in Different system/server and they are connected with each other. 1)Presentation 2)Application 3) Database

SAP System Architecture SAP GUI

Web Browser

DIAG

HTTP, HTTPS

SAP Web Application Server(SAP Instance)

SMTP, SOAP, XML,…

Dispatcher

SAP Web AS Java

Queue

D

D

B

V

M

Dispatcher Queue

S

E

ICM

SAP Buffer (Shared Mem)

Memory Pipe

G

Oracle Informix

Database Server

DB2 MS SQL Server MAX DB

Before sap comes in to Three Tier Architecture it was in to One Tire and Tow Tire that as follow:

- 13 -


Version ECC 6.0

SAP System Configuration

One -tier configuration

Two - tier configuration

Three -tier configuration

Presentation Presentation processes

Application Application processes

Database

Database , application , presentation processes

Database , application processes

Database processes

Types of Data in SAP

Data in SAP System ≈ 90 tables

User Master configurations ≈ xxxx tables

Customizing

1. Client-dependent Data (Client-Specific)

Master Application ≈ xx,xxx tablesTransaction

Customizing 2. Client-independent Data (Cross-Client)

e.g. printer

ABAP programs

Repository

- 14 -


Version ECC 6.0

LOGIN IN TO SAP On the desk top, In the following screen:

- 15 -


Version ECC 6.0

This is GUI to login to SAP. Double click on this

icon is GUI (Graphical User Interphase) which help you to login to or to In the screen is your desk top. This enter into the SAP. When you double click on this it will display the following screen: Select ecc 6.0 and click on this button (Log on)

In the above screen click on

button which take you to login screen on sap as below:

- 16 -


Version ECC 6.0

Enter your client Number

Enter your User Name Enter your system Password

In the above screen enter Client Number, User Name , System Password and pres entr button so it will take you to easy access screen as below:

Here, the SAP Easy Access initial screen shown below:

- 17 -


Version ECC 6.0

1) Screen Header: The screen header consists of: • • • •

Menu bar Standard toolbar Title bar Application toolbar

2) Screen Banner (menu bar): In previous releases, the title bar and menu bar were at the top of the R/3 window. As of Release 4.6, a screen banner replaces these two elements. The screen banner consists of: 3) Menu bar: GUI interaction buttons The Minimize, Maximize, and Close buttons are no longer in the top right-hand corner. They are now slightly to the left, beside the SAP logo:

You can also find these GUI interaction options in the dropdown menu that appears when you choose left-hand corner.

in the top

4) Screen Banner(standard tool bar): By default, the command field is closed. To display it, choose the arrow to the left of the Save icon:

The command field appears: of the field.

To hide it, choose the arrow to the right (outside)

To display a list of the transactions you used last, choose the dropdown arrow

at the right-hand end of the field.

5) Title bar: The page title bar appears below the top-level navigation bar and relates to the currently displayed portal page. It contains items pertinent to the runtime navigation of portal pages, as well as items related to the identification, personalization, and handling of portal pages. B.&C. Menu bar and Standard Tool Bar functions Main Menu Bar and Standard Toolbar Use You can call functions that relate to the whole system from the main menu bar and the standard toolbar (at the top of the application window). You call functions that relate to a particular object from the menu bar in the respective object editor.

- 18 -


Version ECC 6.0 Features The following table lists all the functions that you can access from the various menus. You can call the most important functions in the main menu bar directly from the standard toolbar as well.

Function

Description

New

Calls the Create Object function

Open

Opens the object that is selected in the navigation tree

Copy Object

Copies the selected object

Delete

Deletes the selected object Saves all entries in the opened editors

Save All Close All

Closes all open editors

Search

Calls search help

Where-Used List

Calls the where-used list for the selected object

Exit

Closes the application

Function

Description

Send System Message ... Display Message

System

Sends a system message to all users who are logged on. You can classify the message as a warning or information message. Displays system messages Calls the personal settings function

Personal Settings User Role→Open (

)

User Role→New (

)

Calls the function for opening/creating user roles.

Tools Menu (Integration Repository) Function

Description

Java Proxy Generation

Generates proxies in a software component version (see Java Proxy Generation)

- 19 -


Version ECC 6.0 Transfer from System Landscape Directory → Import Software Component Versions

Calls the function for importing software component versions

Transfer from System Landscape Directory → Update Application Components

Calls the function for updating application components

Release-Transfer Wizard

Calls the release transfer function

Import Design Objects

Calls the function for importing design objects (see Transporting XI Objects)

Export Design Objects

Calls the function for exporting design objects (see Transporting XI Objects)

Find Transports

Calls the function for finding transports

Tools Menu (Integration Directory) Function

Description

Transfer Integration Scenario from Repository

Calls the integration scenario configuration

Configuration Wizard

Calls the configuration wizard.

Value Mapping

Calls the value mapping function

Create Communication Channels Automatically

Calls the function for creating communication channels automatically

Define Web Service

Calls the wizard for defining Web services.

Import Configuration Objects

Calls the function for importing configuration objects (see Exporting and Importing Integration Objects)

Export Configuration Objects

Calls the function for exporting configuration objects (see Exporting and Importing Integration Objects)

Environment Menu Function

Description

Cache Notifications

Calls the cache notifications function

Delete SLD Data Cache

Calls the function to clear the SLD cache

Environment Tools Menu (Integration Repository) Function Integration (Configuration)

Description Builder

Calls the Integration Builder (Integration Directory)

Environment Tools Menu (Integration Directory) Function

Description

- 20 -


Version ECC 6.0 Integration (Design)

Builder

Calls the Integration Builder (Integration Repository)

Help Menu Function Application Help

Description Calls the Online Help for SAP Exchange Infrastructure from the SAP Library

Legend

Calls the legend in which all the icons used on the user interface are explained

Info

Calls a page containing information about the current session (for example, user logged on, server used)

What is Client? Definition A commercially, organizationally, and technically self-contained unit within an SAP System. Clients have their own master records and set of tables. The definition of the client organizational unit is obligatory. The client is the highest level in the SAP System hierarchy. Specifications that you make, or data that you enter at this level are valid for all company codes and for all other organizational structures. You therefore only need to make these specifications, or enter this data once. This ensures that the data is consistent. Users must enter a client key when they log on to the SAP System. This defines the client in which they wish to work. All the entries you make are saved per client. Data processing and analysis is also carried out per client. This means that you cannot include customer accounts from different clients in one dunning run. Access authorization is assigned per client. You must create a user master record for each user in the client where he or she wishes to work. The SAP System is delivered with the clients 000 and 001 - these clients already contain default settings. For more information, see Setting Up Clients in Customizing. These sections are automatically selected when you create your implementation projects (company IMG, project IMG).

- 21 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 22 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 23 -


Version ECC 6.0 ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE CONFIGURATION

Creating Top Company: The smallest organizational unit for which individual financial statements are created according to the relevant legal requirements. A company can include one or more company codes. The definition of the company organizational unit is optional. A company’s financial statements also form the basis of consolidated financial statements. All of the company codes within a company must use the same chart of accounts and fiscal year. However, each company code can have a different local currency.

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting->Define Company. Transaction Code: OX15 Database Table: T880 Click on IMG activity

and click on New Entries

in displayed window so it give following window.

Give the required details as above screen shows. Now click save SPRO screen. When u click on save button the following window will display:

- 24 -

button and click on back button

to go back to


Version ECC 6.0 Now just click clicks enter button or click on continue button.

Define Credit Control Area: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Define Credit Control Area. Transaction Code: OB54 Database Table: T014, T014T Click on IMG activity


in displayed window so it gives following window.

Give the required details as above screen shows. Now click save


to go back.

In the next screen just fill the Description against your credit control area which you created above as follow. Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code

- 25 -


Version ECC 6.0

Now click save


to go back to SPRO screen.

Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code:

Smallest organizational unit of external accounting for which a complete, self-contained set of accounts can be created. This includes the entry of all transactions that must be posted and the creation of all items for legal individual financial statements, such as the balance sheet and the profit and loss statement. The definition of the company code organizational unit is obligatory. The company code is the central organizational unit of external accounting within the SAP System. You must define at least one company code before implementing the Financial Accounting component. The business transactions relevant for Financial Accounting are entered, saved, and evaluated at company code level. You usually create a legally independent company in the SAP System with one company code. However, you can also define a company code according to other criteria. A company code could also be a separate, but not independent, commercial place of work. This is necessary for example, if the place of work is actually situated in a different country and evaluations therefore have to be carried out in the appropriate national currency and in accordance with other tax and legal specifications. If you want to manage the accounting for several independent companies simultaneously, you can set up several company codes in one client. You must set up at least one company code in each client. If you use other components of the SAP System, you have to make assignments between the company code as the central organizational unit of Financial Accounting, and the organizational units of the other components. This is necessary to ensure that data can be transferred between the components.

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code. Transaction Code: OX02 Database Table: T880

- 26 -


Version ECC 6.0 Click on IMG activity

and display following window.

Now double click in “Edit Company Code Data” or select this line and click on chose button take to another window now click on New Entries

Now click save

, so it will

in displayed window so it gives following window.

button so it will address window as follow:

- 27 -


Version ECC 6.0

Once you filled all above required just click on continue button on back button

so it will save all the settings and to go back click


Define Business Area: Organizational unit of external accounting that corresponds to a specific business segment or area of responsibility in a company. Movements in value entered in Financial Accounting are assigned to business areas. Financial statements can be created for business areas for internal purposes. The definition of the business area organizational unit is optional. Business areas are used in external segment reporting (over and above company codes), based on the significant areas of operation of a company (for example, product lines, branches). To post items in a business area, enter the business area when you enter the business transaction. However, the business area can also be derived from other account assignments, such as the cost center. To enable the system to do this, you must define the business area in the cost center master record. PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting->Define Business Area. Transaction Code: OX02 Database Table: TGSB, TGSBT Click on IMG activity



- 28 -


Version ECC 6.0

Like above any number of business area’s you can create. Now click save



Define Functional Area: Account assignment characteristic that sorts operating expenses according to functions, for example: 1.

Production

2.

Administration

3.

Sales

4. Research and development You can enter the functional area in the master data of the following objects: 1.

G/L account

2.

Cost element

3.

Cost center

4.

Orders Order type Internal orders Sales order for make-to-order production and requirements class Maintenance, service, and QM order Production order, product cost controller, and cost object hierarchy

5.

WBS elements Project profile and project definition WBS element

6.

Networks Network type Network header Network activity During posting, the system derives the functional area from the master data of the assigned objects. In order that expenses can be sorted according to corporate functions, the system derives the functional area for the following postings. • •

Primary postings (postings in Financial Accounting) to a profit and loss account Secondary postings (allocations in Controlling)

- 29 -


Version ECC 6.0 The functional area is derived for both objects involved in the allocation. No functional area is derived in the following cases: • Postings to balance sheet accounts • When creating statistical key figures in Controlling The system derives the functional area after saving. The derived functional area is thus first available in the document created and not on the entry screen. The system derives the functional area according to the following logic: ... •

The system derives the functional area from the master data of the assigned objects. If an object is assigned during a posting, the system checks whether a functional area has been entered in the master record of the object. The system retains this functional area. However, it may be overwritten by subsequent checks.

•

The system derives the functional area from the master record of the G/L account or the cost element. The system checks whether a functional area is entered in the master record of the cost element or the P&L account. This functional area overwrites the functional area derived from the assigned object.

•

The system derives the functional area via substitution for the component Financial Accounting, Event 0005. If a functional area has already been defined, this is overwritten with the functional area obtained via substitution.

Definition of a substitution is necessary: •

Where you are not able to enter a functional area in the master data of an object, for example business process or real estate objects.

•

When you want to specify exceptions where derivation from the object should not occur.

PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Define Functional Area Transaction Code: OKBD Database Table: TFKB, TFKBT Click on IMG activity



- 30 -


Version ECC 6.0 Now click save



- 31 -


Version ECC 6.0 Maintain FM Area PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Maintain FM Area Transaction Code: OKBD Database Table: FM01, FM01T Click on IMG activity

Now click save





Define Segment: Division of a company for which you can create financial statements for external reporting. You can enter a segment in the master record of a profit center. The characteristic Segment is only released in combination with the characteristic Profit Center. If no segment is specified manually during posting (only possible for transactions in Financial Accounting), the segment is determined from the master record of the profit center. This profit center can also be assigned manually or derived. If you want to apply different rules to derive the segment during posting, you can define your own rules for this. IAS requires for segment reporting primary and secondary segmentation, which have different reporting depth. A distinction is made between the following types of segment: Business segment A business segment is a distinguishable subactivity of a company that relates to the manufacture of a product or the provision of a service and that has risks and revenues that differ from those in other business segments. Geographical segment A geographical segment is a distinguishable subactivity of a company that relates to the manufacture of a product or the provision of a service within a specific field of business. The risks and revenues of a geographical segment differ from the subactivities in other fields of business. You can choose which segment type you want to have as the primary or the secondary segmentation. You can use the Segment dimension for the primary segmentation. You can represent the secondary segmentation in your system. You can do this by including a user-defined field Region in your general ledger accounting, for example. PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition->financial Accounting-> Define Segment Database Table: FAGL_SEGM, FAGL_SEGMT Click on IMG activity



- 32 -


Version ECC 6.0

Now click save



Define, copy, delete, check plant: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics - General-> Define, copy, delete, check plant Transaction Code: OX14 Database Table: T001W Click on IMG activity

and click on Define Plant in the following window.

Now click on New Entries


- 33 -


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button

so it will display address window as follow.

- 34 -


Version ECC 6.0

Click on enter button or click on continue button screen.

so it will save, click on back button

to go back to SPRO

Define Location: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics - General-> Define Location Database Table: T499S Click on IMG activity window.

and now click on New Entries

- 35 -

in displayed window so it give following


Version ECC 6.0 Now click on save button


Click on enter button or click on continue button screen


to go back to SPRO

Define, copy, delete, check division: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics - General-> Define, copy, delete, check division Transaction Code: OVXB Database Table: TSPA, TSPAT Click on IMG activity

and click on Define Division in the following window

- 36 -


Version ECC 6.0

. in displayed window so it give following window



and click on back button


Define, copy, delete, check sales organization: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Define, copy, delete, check sales organization Transaction Code: OVX5 Database Table: TVKO, TVKOT Click on IMG activity

and click on Define Sales Organization in the following window.


in displayed window so it give following window

- 37 -


Version ECC 6.0





- 38 -

to go back to SPRO


Version ECC 6.0 Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel Transaction Code: OVXI Database Table: TVTW, TVTWT Click on IMG activity

and click on Define Distribution Channel in the following window.





to go back to SPRO screen

Maintain sales office PATH:: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Maintain sales office Transaction Code: OVX1 Database Table: TVBUR, TVKBT Click on IMG activity window

and Now click on New Entries

- 39 -



Version ECC 6.0

Now click on save button .




to go back to SPRO

Maintain sales group: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Sales and Distribution-> Maintain sales group. Transaction Code: OVX4 Database Table: TVGRT, TVKGR.

- 40 -


Version ECC 6.0 Click on IMG activity window


and now click on New Entries

, and click on back button



- 41 -


Version ECC 6.0 Maintain storage location PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Materials Management-> Maintain storage location. Transaction Code: OX09 Database Table: T001L, TWLAD Click on IMG activity

it will ask plant as follow.

Enter plant and click enter or continue button now click on New Entries

.


Enter the storage location and description and save it.

- 42 -


Version ECC 6.0

Click on this

Select this line.

Now select your storage location and pre on “Address of Storage Location” under dialog structure. So it will display the following window on this click on New Entries

In the above widow enter number 1 and click on save button

- 43 -

so it will display address widow as follow.


Version ECC 6.0



to go back to SPRO

Maintain purchasing organization PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Materials Management-> Maintain purchasing organization. Transaction Code: OX08 Database Table: T024E Click on IMG activity

it will display following window on this click on New Entries

in above screen fill required data and save button


- 44 -

.



Version ECC 6.0

Define, copy, delete, check shipping point: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics Execution -> Define, copy, delete, check shipping point. Transaction Code: OVXD Database Table: TVST, TVSTT Click on IMG activity

click on New Entries

it will display following window on this click on Define Shipping Point.

. And fill the required fields as follow.

- 45 -


Version ECC 6.0



- 46 -


Version ECC 6.0



to go back to SPRO

Maintain loading point PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics Execution -> Maintain loading point Transaction Code: OVX7 Database Table: TVLA, TVLAT Click on IMG activity

click on New Entries

it will display following window on this Define Shipping Point and click enter.

. And fill the required fields as follow.

- 47 -


Version ECC 6.0




Maintain transportation planning point PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure->Definition-> Logistics Execution -> Maintain transportation planning point. Transaction Code: OVXT Database Table: TTDS, TTDST Click on IMG activity it will display following window on this click on New Entries required fields as follow



- 48 -

. And fill the


Version ECC 6.0



to go back to SPRO

ASSIGNMENT Assign company code to company: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Financial Accounting -> Assign company code to company. Transaction Code: OX16 Database Table: T001 Click on IMG activity it will display following window, click on position button will display the following small window:

so it

On this entry your company code and pres enter or click on continue button. So it will display your company code at the top of window as follow.

- 49 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above screen 1102 is your company code for that you have to assign your top company code 1101. Now click on save button

to save and to back click on back button


Assign company code to credit control area PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Financial Accounting -> Assign company code to credit control area. Transaction Code: OB38 Database Table: T001 Click on IMG activity it will display following window, click on position button will display the following small window:

so it


Against to your company code assign your credit control area. Now click on save button


- 50 -



Version ECC 6.0 Assign company code to financial management area: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Financial Accounting -> Assign company code to financial management area. Transaction Code: OF18 Database Table: T001 Click on IMG activity it will display following window, click on position button will display the following small window:

so it


Against to your company code assign your FM Area. Now click on save button



Assign plant to company code: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Logistics - General-> Assign Assign plant to company code. Transaction Code: OX18 Database Table: T001K, T001W, TASSIGN_MM_T001W Click on IMG activity

it will display following window, click on new Entries button

- 51 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter your company code and plant. Now click on save button



Assign Business Area to Plant/Valuation Area and Division: PATH: SPRO->Enterprise Structure-> Assignment -> Logistics - General-> Assign Business Area to Plant/Valuation Area and Division Transaction Code: OMJ7 Database Table: T134G, T134H Click on IMG activity

it will display following window, click on Plant/valuation area – Division button

It will display following window, click on new Entries button

- 52 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

Now fill the details of plant, division, business area. Now click on save button



Assign sales organization to company code: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution Æ Assign sales organization to company code Transaction Code: OVX3 Database Table: TASSIGN_SD_VKORG, TVKO Click on IMG activity it will display following window, click on position button will display the following small window:

so it

On this entry your sales organization and pres enter or click on continue button. So it will display your company code at the top of window as follow.

To your sales organization assign your company code. Now click on save button


- 53 -



Version ECC 6.0 Assign distribution channel to sales organization: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution ÆAssign distribution channel to sales organization. Transaction Code: OVXK Database Table: V_TVKOV_ASSIGN, TVKOV Click on IMG activity


.

In the above screen assign distribution channel to sales organization. Now click on save button



Assign division to sales organization: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution ÆAssign division to sales organization. Transaction Code: OVXA Database Table: V_TVKOS_ASSIGN, TVKOS Click on IMG activity


In the above window assign division to sales organization. Now click on save button



Set up sales area: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution ÆSet up sales area. Transaction Code: OVXG Database Table: V_TVTA_ASSIGN, TVTA

- 54 -

.


Version ECC 6.0 Click on IMG activity


.

Assign sales organization to distribution channel and distribution channel to division. Now click on save button



Assign sales office to sales area: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution ÆAssign sales office to sales area Transaction Code: OVXM Database Table: V_TVKBZ_ASSIGN, TVKBZ Click on IMG activity


.

In this screen assign sales organization to distribution channel, distribution channel to division, division to sale office. Now click on save button



Assign sales group to sales office: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution ÆAssign sales group to sales office. Transaction Code: OVXJ Database Table: V_TVBVK_ASSIGN, TVBVK Click on IMG activity


- 55 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

In this screen sales group is assigned to sales office. Now click on save button



Assign sales organization - distribution channel – plant: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution ÆAssign sales organization distribution channel – plant. Transaction Code: OVX6 Database Table: V_TVKWZ_ASSIGN, TVKWZ Click on IMG activity


.

Assign sales organization to distribution channel and distribution channel to plant. Now click on save button



Assign sales area to credit control area: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and Distribution ÆAssign sales area to credit control area. Transaction Code: OVFL Database Table: V_TVTA_KKB, TVTA Click on IMG activity

it will display following window, click on

So your sales area will appears at top of screen.

- 56 -

button.


Version ECC 6.0

Assign credit control area to sales area. Now click on save button



Define Rules By Sales Area: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Sales and DistributionÆ Business Area Account AssignmentÆ Define Rules By Sales Area. Transaction Code: OVF2 Database Table: V_TVTA_GRE, TVTA Click on IMG activity


Now pres enter so your sales organization display on the top of window.

In this step assign Rule 1 to your sales organization. “1-Business area determination from plant/division (T134G)”

- 57 -

button.


Version ECC 6.0 Now click on save button


- 58 -



Version ECC 6.0 Assign purchasing organization to company code PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Materials Management Æ Assign purchasing organization to company code. Transaction Code: OX01 Database Table: V_T024E_ASSIGN, T024E Click on IMG activity


button.

Type your purchasing organization and pres enter so that will appears on the top of the scree.

Now assign your company code to your purchasing organization. Now click on save button



Assign purchasing organization to plant: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Materials Management Æ Assign purchasing organization to plant Transaction Code: OX17 Database Table: W_T024W_ASSIGNT024W Click on IMG activity


- 59 -

.


Version ECC 6.0




Assign shipping point to plant Assign purchasing organization to plant: PATH: SPROÆEnterprise StructureÆ Assignment Æ Logistics ExecutionÆ Assign shipping point to plant Transaction Code: OVXC Database Table: OVXC, TVSWZ The following widow will display now pres ctrl+f

In the small window type your plant and pres enter so your plant will appears on the top of screen as follow.

- 60 -


Version ECC 6.0

Double click on your plant

Flag on the heck box which is your shipping point

In this screen double click on your plant so it will display another window on this small window search your shipping point and flag the check box and pres enter or continue button so your shipping point will assign to your plant.

Like above your assignment will be completed. Now click on save button


- 61 -



Version ECC 6.0

- 62 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Common Distribution Channels PATH: SPROÆ Sales and DistributionÆ Master DataÆ Define Common Distribution Channels. Transaction Code: VOR1 Database Table: TVKOV, TVTA Click on IMG activity

and click on

so it will display the following window:

In the above window enter your sales organization and pres enter or click on continue button. It will display your sales organization on the top of window as follow:

In this screen assign your distribution Channel to your sales organization. Now click save


to go back.

Define Common Divisions PATH: SPROÆ Sales and DistributionÆ Master DataÆ Define Common Divisions Transaction Code: VOR2 Database Table: TVKOS, TVTA Click on IMG activity

and click on


- 63 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above window enter your sales organization and pres enter or click on continue button. It will display your sales organization on the top of window as follow:

In the above screen assign division to your sales organization. Now click save


to go back.

- 64 -


Version ECC 6.0 FISCAL YEAR You have the following options for defining your fiscal year variants in relation to the calendar year: Fiscal year same as calendar year Fiscal year differs from calendar year (non-calendar fiscal year). The posting periods can also be different to the calendar months. Your fiscal year is year-dependent This means that the fiscal year only applies to a specific calendar year. Fiscal Year Same as Calendar Year If your fiscal year is the same as the calendar year, the following specifications apply: • • •

The fiscal year begins on January 1. Twelve posting periods are available. The periods correspond to calendar months. You do not have to define the individual periods. The system automatically uses the calendar months.

Non-Calendar Fiscal Year If your fiscal year differs from the calendar year, you must specify: • • •

How many posting periods you require How the system should determine the posting period and fiscal year from the posting date during posting: To enable the system to determine the posting period, specify month and day limits for the end of each period.

Fiscal Year Since your fiscal year is not the same as the calendar year, you have to specify the year displacement for each posting period. You can use the entries -1, 0, and +1 for this. In the illustration that follows, your fiscal year begins on April 1 and ends on March 31. The period limits correspond to the beginning and end of the calendar months. Since the fiscal year does not correspond to the calendar year, you specify how the fiscal year is to be determined by entering the year displacement. If you post with a posting date of 02/03/99, the system uses your definition of the fiscal year variant to determine that posting period 11 is in fiscal year 1998.

- 65 -


Version ECC 6.0 Posting Periods Do Not Correspond To Calendar Months. If you are using a non-calendar fiscal year, and your posting periods do not correspond to the calendar months, define the difference by specifying the day of the period end. Your fiscal year begins on April 16 and ends on April 15. The start and end of your posting periods do not correspond to the start and end of a calendar month. You must split the period 12/16 to 01/15 in two posting periods, since you require different specifications for the year displacement. This means that for posting period 9, you have to define two posting periods (with year displacements 0 and -1).

In the example given, the system would determine the following posting periods and fiscal years from the posting dates given: Posting Date

Year Displacement

Period

Fiscal Year

20.12.1998

0

9

1998

13.01.1999

-1

9

1998

Year-Dependent Fiscal Year Variants You can define a year-dependent fiscal year variant. This is a fiscal year variant that only applies to a specific calendar year. To do this, select the field Year-dependent when you define your fiscal year variants. You then have to enter the period ends, defined by month and day limits, for each calendar year. In this case, the year displacement specifications refer to the calendar year for which you have defined posting periods. The year is displayed when you maintain the period ends. Special Periods Special posting periods that subdivide the last regular posting period for closing operations. Irrespective of how you have defined your fiscal year, you can also use special periods. Special periods subdivide the year-end closing period. They therefore merely divide the last posting period into several closing periods. This enables you to create several supplementary financial statements.

- 66 -


Version ECC 6.0

A fiscal year usually has 12 posting periods. In General Ledger Accounting, you can define up to four special periods. If you do not need 12 posting periods, you can use the posting periods that are not required as special periods. If you use these additional closing periods, you must specify the number you require in the field No. special periods. when defining the fiscal year variants. You cannot exceed a maximum of 16 periods. When posting to special periods, you must take the following into consideration: • The posting date must fall within the last regular posting period. • You have to enter the special periods in the document header in the Period field, since the special periods cannot be determined automatically by the system. Maintain Fiscal Year Variant (Maintain Shortened Fisc. Year) PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆFiscal Year and Posting PeriodsÆMaintain Fiscal Year Variant (Maintain Shortened Fisc. Year). Transaction code: OB29 Database Table: T009, T009T Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take to another screen. Here pres on

Click on save button

to save the activity and go back

.

to SPRO screen.

NOTE: If your Fiscal Year is Non-Calendar year (with 12 months) the following way is to perform the activity. Click on


- 67 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

2) Double click on this structure

1) Select this line

Click on save button to save the activity and select the line which you just enter and double click on periods option under dialog structure, so it will take to another screen as follows.



to SPRO screen.

NOTE: If your Fiscal Year is Non-Calendar year with 24 months the following way is to perform the activity.

- 68 -


Version ECC 6.0

Double click on this structure

Select this line

Click on save button to save the activity and select the line which you just enter and double click on periods option under dialog structure, so it will take to another screen as follows.

- 69 -


Version ECC 6.0 Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Assign Company Code to a Fiscal Year Variant PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆFiscal Year and Posting PeriodsÆ Assign Company Code to a Fiscal Year Variant. Transaction code: OB37 Database Table: T001, T882 Click on window:

(IMG Activity), in this screen click on

button, so it will display an small

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code will display on the top of the screen as follow.

Now enter your Fiscal Year Variant. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

POSTING PERIODS When you record a document, you enter the posting date. When you post the document, the system uses the posting date specified to automatically determine the posting period. The posting period consists of a month and a fiscal year. These are both displayed in the document overview. The posting period determined is entered in the document and the transaction figures for this period are updated. For postings to the previous fiscal year, the system carries out the following adjustments: For balance sheet accounts, the system adjusts the carry forward balance of the accounts concerned in the current fiscal year. For profit and loss accounts, the profit or loss carried forward to the retained earnings account is adjusted.

- 70 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Variants for Open Posting Periods PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆFiscal Year and Posting PeriodsÆ Posting PeriodsÆ Define Variants for Open Posting Periods. Transaction code: OBBO Database Table: T010O, T010P Click on


Enter new variant and description in this screen. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 71 -

.


Version ECC 6.0 Assign Variants to Company Code PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆFiscal Year and Posting PeriodsÆ Posting PeriodsÆ Assign Variants to Company Code. Transaction code: OBBP Database Table: T001 Click on window:

(IMG Activity), in this screen click on

button, so it will display an small

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code will display on the top of the screen as follow.

In this screen assign your posting periods variant (which you created in above step) to your company code. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Open and Close Posting Periods You define posting periods in your fiscal year variants. You can open and close these posting periods for posting. As many periods as you require can be open for posting simultaneously. Usually, only the current posting period is open for posting, all other posting periods are closed. At the end of this posting period, the period is closed, and the next posting period is opened. Special periods can be open for closing postings during the period-end closing. You have the following options for opening and closing posting periods. Posting Period Variants You can specify which company codes are open for posting in a posting period variant. Posting period variants are cross-company code and you have to assign them to your company codes. The posting periods are then opened and closed simultaneously for all company codes via the posting period variants.

- 72 -


Version ECC 6.0 Working with posting period variants is recommended if you are responsible for a large number of company codes. Since you only have to open and close the posting period once for the variant, your work is considerably reduced. Account Type You can differentiate the opening and closing of posting periods by account type. This means that for a specific posting period, postings can be permitted to customer accounts, but not to vendor accounts. For each posting period that should be open, you must always specify at least account type. You can exercise more detailed control by specifying further account types. Using the minimum entry, when you enter the posting date in the document header, the system checks whether the posting period determined in the posting period variant can be posted to. As soon as you then enter an account number, in a second step, the system checks whether the posting period is permitted for the account specified. Account Interval You can differentiate the opening and closing of posting periods by account intervals. This means that you only open a posting period for posting to a specific account. Account intervals always apply to G/L accounts. If you want to open sub ledger accounts, you have to enter the corresponding reconciliation account and the account type. During the closing operations, you can, for example, use the reconciliation accounts to close customer and vendor accounts before G/L accounts. This allows you to prevent further postings to these accounts after you have confirmed the balances with your customers and vendors. Balance confirmation is one of the prerequisites for further closing operations. You can open and close posting periods only for specific users. To do this, enter an authorization group at document header level. This authorization group is effective only in time period 1 and prevents users who do not have the appropriate authorization for the authorization object F_BKPF_BUP (accounting document: Authorization for posting periods) from posting in periods which are only open for time period 1. Example:

PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆFiscal Year and Posting PeriodsÆ Posting PeriodsÆ Open and Close Posting Periods. Transaction code: OB52 Database Table: T001B Click on


- 73 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

Enter the parameters as the client required. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Define Ledgers for General Ledger Accounting Ledger A ledger is a section of a database table. A ledger only contains those dimensions of the totals table that the ledger is based on and that are required for reporting. In General Ledger Accounting, you can use several ledgers in parallel. This allows you to produce financial statements according to different accounting principles, for example. You create a ledger for each of the general ledgers you need. A ledger uses several dimensions from the totals table it is based on. Each dimension of the totals table represents a subset of the coding block. You can also include customer fields in your ledgers. To do this, you have to add the customer field to the coding block and then include this field in the totals table that the ledger is based on. Non-leading ledger The non-leading ledgers are parallel ledgers to the leading ledger. They can be based on a local accounting principle, for example. You have to activate a non-leading ledger for the individual company codes. Posting procedures with sub ledger or G/L accounts managed on an open item basis always affect all ledgers. This means that you cannot perform ledger-specific postings to sub ledger or G/L accounts managed on an open item basis. If you manage G/L accounts on an open item basis to monitor accounting aspects such as reserve allocations and reversals, you need to take additional measures in your internal controls system. Non-leading ledgers can have different fiscal year variants and different posting period variants per company code to the leading ledger of this company code. The second and third currency of the non-leading ledger must be a currency that is managed as second or third currency in the respective company code. However, you do not have to have a second and third currency in the parallel ledgers; these are optional. Alternative currencies are not possible. Rollup ledgers In addition to your parallel ledgers, you can also define a rollup ledger for special reporting purposes. In a rollup ledger, you can combine summarized data from other ledgers in General Ledger Accounting. This enables you to compile cumulated reports on different ledgers. Day ledgers

- 74 -


Version ECC 6.0 You use a day ledger to create a day ledger if you want to create reports for average balances (reports for displaying average daily balances). You can activate the day ledger for drilldown reporting. You may not define day ledgers as the leading ledger or as the representative ledger in a ledger group. NON – LEADING LEDGERS PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆ LedgersÆ Define Ledgers for General Ledger Accounting Database Table: T881; FAGL_TLDGRP; FAGL_TLDGRPT; FAGL_TLDGRP_MAP; V_FAGL_T881 Click on


.

Click on this F4 function to get this Totals Table

Click on save button to save the activity and go back Define and Activate Non-Leading Ledgers

to SPRO screen.

PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆ LedgersÆ Define and Activate Non-Leading Ledgers Database Table: V_FAGL_T882G, T882G Click on

(IMG Activity), It will display an small window and ask for a ledger:

Enter your one of the non-leading ledgers (X1) and pres enter or click continue button screen. Now pres

button.

- 75 -

so it will take to another


Version ECC 6.0

C1: Currency type First Currency FV: Fiscal year variant VAR: Posting Periods Variant In this screen enter relevant parameters save activity.

it and go back

to SPRO screen and again pres the same IMG

Now enter your another non-leading ledger (x2) and pres enter or click continue button screen. Now pres


button.


to SPRO screen.

- 76 -

so it will take to another


Version ECC 6.0 Activate Cost of Sales Accounting PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆ LedgersÆ Activate Cost of Sales Accounting. Database Table: T001 Click on (IMG Activity), so will take you to screen there click on display following small window:

button so it will

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code will display on the top of the screen as follow

Click on this so it will display options

Options or 1. Inactive 2. In preparation 3. Active Out of above 3 options select Active option against your company code. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Define Field Status Variants PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆFieldsÆ Define Field Status Variants. Transaction Code: OBC4 Database Table: T001F, T001G, T001V, T001W

- 77 -


Version ECC 6.0 Click on

(IMG Activity), it will take open the screen.

2) After selecting FSTV click on this copy as button

in this screen select “1000” Field status variants and pres Cops as Button

1) Select this FSTV

so it will display the following screen.

In the above screen change the FStv and field status name as follow.

1) click on this button

After changing the name of variant and description just pres enter button it will display an small information window. Now we have to click on “Copy all ” it will display another information button just pres enter or continue button.

- 78 -


Version ECC 6.0

Your field status is copied: Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆFieldsÆ Assign Company Code to Field Status Variants. Transaction Code: OBC5 Database Table: T001 Click on (IMG Activity), so will take you to screen there click on display following small window:

button so it will

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue button. Your company code will display on the top of the screen as follow

In the above screen assign you field status variant to your company code: Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 79 -


Version ECC 6.0 DOCUMENT TYPES Document types we distinguish between original documents and IT documents. Examples of original documents are receipts, invoices, checks, or bank statements. Examples of IT documents are accounting documents, sample documents, or recurring entry documents. The accounting document reproduces the original document in the system. All other IT documents are used as entry tools. Each document then remains in the system as a coherent unit until it is archived. Documents are essential for checking the accuracy of postings in the compact journal and general ledger. For this reason, each posting is based on a document. Documents represent the link between the business transaction and posting in accounting. Only complete documents can be posted in the SAP system. "Complete" means that the balance from the debit and credit items is zero. Further conditions for posting a document are that you must enter the basic account assignment data, such as document date, posting date, document type, posting key, account number, and amounts. You must make entries in all the required fields (these are defined as "required" during system configuration). A document consists of a document header and at least two document line items: ●

Document Header

The document header is a part of the document that contains information that applies to the entire document, such as the document date and document number. It also includes controlling information such as the document type. ●

Document Line Item

The document line item is a part of the document that contains information on an item. This includes the amount, an account number, whether the item is a debit or credit, and additional information depending on the transaction to be posted. A document line item can also contain additional account assignments (for example, profit center, cost center) and an explanatory text. •

Document Views

You can display a document in two different views in General Ledger Accounting: ●

Entry View

In the entry view, a document contains the document line items originally entered or transferred from the original component. ●

General Ledger View

In the general ledger view, a document contains the document line items originally entered or transferred from the original component, split line items generated by document splitting, or additionally generated clearing items. Documents in the general ledger view always apply to a specific ledger. You can display the posted documents in the entry view and in the general ledger view. For more information, see Document Display. The document type has the following functions: Differentiating between business transactions. The document type tells you instantly what sort of business transaction is in question. This is useful, for example, when displaying line items for an account.

- 80 -


Version ECC 6.0 Controlling the posting to account types (vendor, customer, or G/L accounts). The document type determines which account types that particular document can be posted to.

Assigning document numbers: A number range is assigned to every document type. The numbers for the documents you create are taken from this number range. The original documents from one number range should be stored together. In this way, the document type controls document storage. To ensure that the document numbers in the leading ledger as well as those in the non-leading ledgers do not present any gaps, you should define a document type with its own number range for postings from valuations to the leading ledger. You then use this document type for valuation postings to the non-leading ledgers as well. Notwithstanding, you assign a distinct number range to this document type for postings from valuations to non-leading ledgers. In General Ledger Accounting, the document types you define for the documents in the entry view need to be different to those for the documents in the general ledger view: Document Types for Documents in Entry View For your leading ledger, you can use the document types delivered by SAP or you can define your own document types. For your non-leading ledgers, you only need to define separate document types for documents in the entry view for those ledgers that are used as the representative ledger in a ledger group. Document Types for Documents in General Ledger View For the leading ledger, the document in the entry view corresponds to the document in the general ledger view. Consequently, you do not need to define separate document types for documents in the general ledger view. For your non-leading ledgers, you only need to define separate document types for documents in the general ledger view if the fiscal year variant of the non-leading ledger differs from the fiscal year variant of the leading ledger in a given company code. Define Document Types for Entry View PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Document TypesÆ Define Document Types for Entry View Transaction Code: OBA7 Database Table: T003, T003T Click on

(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen as follow.

- 81 -


Version ECC 6.0

Select this details button

Select Document Type

Select one of the document type and select details button.

Like above for every document type it has its own parameters as per the transaction requirement. SAP has provided all the Document Types for an industry so no need to prepare any new one. If you want to prepare any new Document Type pres on

and fill the parameters as follow:

- 82 -


Version ECC 6.0



to SPRO screen.

Define Document Types for Entry View in a Ledger PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Document TypesÆ Define Document Types for Entry View in a Ledger Database Table: T003, T003T Click on

(IMG Activity), so it will display the follow window.

“X1” is the Non-Leading Ledger which we created in above steps. Now pres enter or click on continue button and pres

- 83 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 84 -


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button Now again Click on follow window


to SPRO screen.

(IMG Activity), “Define Document Types for Entry View in a Ledger “so it will display the


- 85 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 86 -




to SPRO screen.

- 87 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Document Types for General Ledger View PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆDocument TypesÆ Define Document Types for General Ledger View Click on

(IMG Activity), so it will display the follow window.


- 88 -


Version ECC 6.0

Click on save button Now again Click on follow window


to SPRO screen.

(IMG Activity), “Define Document Types for General Ledger View “so it will display the

“X2” is the Non-Leading Ledger which we created in above steps.

- 89 -


Version ECC 6.0 Now pres enter or click on continue button and pres

- 90 -




to SPRO screen.

- 91 -


Version ECC 6.0 DOCUMENT NUMBER RANGES In the SAP System, every document is assigned a number that identifies it uniquely within a fiscal year and company code. There are two types of number assignment: External (by the user) The accounting clerk enters the number of the original document during document entry, or the number is transferred automatically from a pre-invoicing system. A prerequisite is that the document numbers are unique. The system checks whether the number entered already exists and prevents users from assigning the same number twice. Numbers assigned to documents that have been archived however, can be reused. Internal (by the system) The system automatically assigns a sequential number. The accounting clerk transfers this SAP document number to the printed original document and then files it using this number. This method is used if the original documents do not have a unique document number. This is the case, for example, with vendor invoices. You use a number range to define how the document number is assigned. Each document type has a specific number range from which the document number is selected. When you reverse documents, the system automatically assigns a number for the reverse document. To do this, the system requires a document type that has internal number assignment. Every document type with external number assignment must therefore be assigned a reverse document type that has internal number assignment. Documents posted with a document type that has internal number assignment are reversed by the system using the same document type if you do not specify a separate reverse document type. Defining Number Ranges You can define number ranges as follows: You can define number ranges for each company code. Thus, each company code can use the same number interval. You can define number range intervals as year-specific. You define number ranges in the system separately for master records and documents. You can therefore use the same number range keys for both master records and documents. In the Financial Accounting (FI) component, you can also define alphanumeric number ranges. In this case, however, the document numbers can only be assigned externally. It is advisable to select year-specific number ranges. You therefore only need smaller intervals and can store the document numbers separately according to fiscal years. You therefore avoid documents from the old and New Year alternating in January. Since documents may be kept in the system for an indefinite amount of time, you need to define intervals that are large enough to handle this factor. To do this, you need to determine the volume of documents created each year for document types that use the same number range. Multiply the number of documents by the number of years the system can retain a document for. This gives you the required interval capacity. Specify an interval a little larger than that to make sure it is sufficient. For every number range, you must specify the following parameters: • A key • A validity date (a year value) until which the number range is valid (see 2 in the following diagram)

- 92 -


Version ECC 6.0 •

An interval from which the numbers are chosen (see 3 in the following diagram) The intervals for number ranges must not overlap.

Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Document Number RangesÆ Define Document Number Ranges for Entry View Transaction Code: FBN1 Click on


Now enter your company code and pres on Edit Intervals button it will go to another screen as follow.

Now click on insert inter intervals button so it will display an separate window as follow.

- 93 -


Version ECC 6.0 After entering above data pres enter or click on insert button screen.

so the data which you entered will com to mail

Now again click on insert inter intervals button so it will display same window and enter another number range and interval.

These 2 are Non-Leading Number ranges, these also should be maintain in this screen

Note: in the above screen we have to maintain the Non-Leading ledger Number ranges also. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Define Document Number Ranges for General Ledger View PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Document Number RangesÆ Define Document Number Ranges for General Ledger View. Transaction Code: FBN1 Click on


- 94 -


Version ECC 6.0

Now enter your company code and pres on Edit Intervals button it will go to another screen as follow.

Now click on insert inter intervals button so it will display an separate window as follow.

After entering above data pres enter or click on insert button screen.


Now again click on insert inter intervals button so it will display same window and enter another number range and interval.

- 95 -


Version ECC 6.0

After entering above data pres enter or click on insert button screen.




to SPRO screen.

Define Posting Keys

- 96 -


Version ECC 6.0 PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Define Posting Keys. Transaction Code: OB41 Click on


- 97 -


Version ECC 6.0 Like above all posting keys are available in sap. Put curser on one of the key and select details button

as follow:

The above screen shows the parameters of each posting key. If your want to create new one just click on Create button and give maintain parameters and save it. Most of all required posting are provided by SAP so need to create any new one. CUSTOMERS

Transaction Posting key 0:Accounting Document 1: Invoice / Credit Memo 2: Reverse Invoice / Credit Memo 3: Bank Charges / Reverse Bank Charges 4: Other Receivable Payments 5: Outgoing / Incoming Payments 6: Payment Clearing 7: Other Clearing 8: Payment Clearing 9: Spl GL Transaction

VENDORS

Dr 0

Cr 1

Dr 2

Cr 3

01

11

21

31

02

12

22

32

03

13

04

14

24

34

05

15

25

35

06 07 08 09

16 17 18 19

26 27 28 29

36 37 38 39

GENERAL LEDGER Dr Cr 4 5 40

- 98 -

50

ASSETS Dr 7

Cr 7

70

75

MATERIALS

Dr 8

Cr 9


Version ECC 6.0 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 89

0: Inventory Taking 1: Inventory Cost 2: Inventory Difference 3: Prince Difference 4: Consumption 5: Changes in Stock 6: GR / IR 9: Stock Inward Movement The above table describes how posting keys are formulated for each transaction.

- 99 -

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 99


Version ECC 6.0 Define Tolerance Groups for Employees PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Tolerance GroupsÆ Define Tolerance Groups for Employees. Transaction Code: OBA4 Database Table: T043T Click on

(IMG Activity), so will take you to screen here click on

it will take to following screen.

Maintain above parameters and save Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Define Tolerance Groups for G/L Accounts PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ General Ledger Accounting (New)Æ Business TransactionsÆ Open Item ClearingÆ Clearing DifferencesÆ Define Tolerance Groups for G/L Accounts. Transaction Code: OBA0 Database Table : T043S Click on


- 100 -



Version ECC 6.0



to SPRO screen.

- 101 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Tolerances (Vendors) PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Business TransactionsÆ Outgoing PaymentsÆ Menual Outgoing PaymentsÆ Define Tolerances (Vendors). Transaction Code: OBA3 Database Table: T043G, T043GT Click on




to SPRO screen.

- 102 -



Version ECC 6.0

- 103 -


Version ECC 6.0 Chart of Account Chart of Accounts The chart of accounts list is a directory of all charts of accounts that can be used in a client. This is a list of all G/L accounts used by one or several company codes. For each G/L account, the chart of accounts contains the account number, account name, and the information that controls how an account functions and how a G/L account is created in a company code.You have to assign a chart of accounts to each company code. This chart of accounts is the operating chart of accounts and is used for the daily postings in this company code. You have the following options when using multiple company codes: You can use the same chart of accounts for all company codes If the company codes all have the same requirements for the chart of accounts set up, assign all of the individual company codes to the same chart of accounts. This could be the case if all company codes are in the same country. In addition to the operating chart of accounts, you can use two additional charts of accounts If the individual company codes need different charts of accounts, you can assign up to two charts of accounts in addition to the operating chart of accounts. This could be the case if company codes lie in multiple countries. The use of different charts of accounts has no effect on the balance sheet and profit and loss statement. When creating the balance sheet or the profit and loss statement, you can choose whether to balance the company codes which use different charts of accounts together or separately. Structure Charts of accounts can have three different functions in the system: • Operating chart of accounts The operating chart of accounts contains the G/L accounts that you use for posting in your company code during daily activities. Financial Accounting and Controlling both use this chart of accounts. You have to assign an operating chart of accounts to a company code. • Group chart of accounts The group chart of accounts contains the G/L accounts that are used by the entire corporate group. This allows the company to provide reports for the entire corporate group. The assigning of an corporate group chart of accounts to a company code is optional. • Country-specific chart of accounts The country-specific chart of accounts contains the G/L accounts needed to meet the country's legal requirements. This allows you to provide statements for the country's legal requirements. The assigning of an country-specific chart of accounts to a company code is optional. The operating chart of accounts is shared by Financial Accounting as well as Controlling. The accounts in a chart of accounts can be both expense or revenue accounts in Financial Accounting and cost or revenue elements in cost/revenue accounting. G/L account master data in the chart of accounts area contains information about the G/L account that is valid for all company codes. The chart of accounts area also contains data that controls how a G/L account is created in the company code-specific area. To make certain that company codes using the same chart of accounts can also use the same G/L accounts, a master record is created for the G/L account in the chart of accounts and in the company code-specific areas. The following information is contained in the chart of accounts area of a G/L account master record. • The chart of accounts

- 104 -


Version ECC 6.0 • •

The account number and account name (short and long text) The indicator that specifies whether the account is a balance sheet account or an P&L statement account.

At the start of a new fiscal year, the balance of a balance sheet account is carried forward to itself. With P&L statement accounts, you must specify the account to which the profit or loss is carried forward at the end of a fiscal year. The account group With the account group, you group similar accounts together and control the creating and changing of master records. They control The account number interval in which the account number must lie. The screen layout for creating G/L accounts in the company code-specific area. This means that you can define whether fields require an entry, may have an entry, or are hidden when creating or changing a master record in the company code-specific area.

Edit Chart of Accounts List If you enter a chart of accounts in the chart of accounts list, note the importance of the following settings: Maintenance language The chart of accounts is created and changed in one language, the maintenance language. This means that the names of the G/L accounts are created and changed in the maintenance language. If the chart of accounts is used by multiple company codes using varying languages, you can translate the account names into the languages needed. Group chart of accounts You can assign an alternative group chart of accounts to the chart of accounts. Length of the G/L account number You can define the length of the G/L account numbers. The maximum length is ten characters. Internally, the system keeps the account numbers with a ten character length. The system pads purely numeric account numbers with zeroes from the left, and alphanumeric account numbers from the right. PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ General Ledger Accounting (New)Æ Master DataÆ G/L AccountsÆ PreparationsÆ Edit Chart of Accounts List. Transaction Code: OB13 Database Table: T004, T004T Click on

(IM Activity), so will take you to screen here click on

- 105 -



Version ECC 6.0



to SPRO screen.

Define Account Group The account group is a summary of accounts based on criteria that effects how master records are created. The account group determines: • The number interval from which the account number is selected when a G/L account is created. • The screen layout for creating G/L accounts in the company code-specific area When you create a G/L account in the chart of accounts area, you must specify an account group. Using the account group, you can group the G/L accounts according to functional area. The account group also defines the set up when creating a G/L account in the company code and chart of accounts. By defining the number interval and the screen layout, you simplify G/L account creation by reducing the number of entry fields. The account group contains the following definitions: Number interval If you create a G/L account with this account group, you must select a number from this number interval. Account number 131000 for G/L account petty cash would be rejected as incorrect since it does not fall within the number interval of account group "Liquid funds". However, you could create this account using the account number 101000. The number intervals for G/L account groups can overlap. As a result, for G/L accounts that you do not want to assign to any special functional area, you can create a separate account group that has a number interval already contained in a different account group.

PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ General Ledger Accounting (New)Æ Master DataÆ G/L AccountsÆ PreparationsÆ Define Account Group. Transaction Code: OBD4

- 106 -


Version ECC 6.0 Database Table: T077S, T077Z Click on




to SPRO screen.

- 107 -



Version ECC 6.0 Define Retained Earnings Account PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ General Ledger Accounting (New)Æ Master DataÆ G/L AccountsÆ PreparationsÆ Define Retained Earnings Account. Transaction Code: OB53 Click on

(IM Activity), so will ask for Chart of accounts as follow:

In this screen enter your chart of accounts and pres enter or continue button. It will display the following screen as follow:

Now click save button it will display following warning message.

Now just pres enter button twice and back to SPRO screen.

- 108 -


Version ECC 6.0 Assign Company Code to Chart of Accounts Transaction Code: OB62 Database Table: T001 It will display an screen in that pres

so it will display following window:

Enter your company code and pres enter or click on continue button so it display your company code on the top of your screen. Against to your company code assign your chart of accounts as follow:



to SPRO screen.

- 109 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 110 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of Customer Account Group Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Customers) PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Customer AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Customer Master DataÆ Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Customers). Transaction Code: OBD2 Database Table: T077D Click on





to SPRO screen.

Define Screen Layout per Company Code (Customers) PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Customer AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Customer Master DataÆ Define Screen Layout per Company Code (Customers). Transaction Code: OB21 Database Table: T079D Click on


- 111 -



Version ECC 6.0 Just enter your company code and pres enter button. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 112 -


Version ECC 6.0 Create Number Ranges for Customer Accounts PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Customer AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Customer Master DataÆ Create Number Ranges for Customer Accounts. Transaction Code: XDN1 Click on

(IM Activity),

(Change Intervals ) button.

so will take you to screen here click on It will take to another screen in this screen click on screen.

Now pres enter key or click on Click on save button

(Insert Interval) button so it will display following

insert button. So it will take the entry to main screen.


to SPRO screen.

- 113 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 114 -


Version ECC 6.0 Assign Number Ranges to Customer Account Groups PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Customer AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Customer Master DataÆ Assign Number Ranges to Customer Account Groups. Transaction Code: OBAR Database Table: T077D Click on

(IM Activity), click on

button so it display following small window.

Enter your Account group and pres enter or continue button so your account group will display on the top of screen as follow:

Against to your customer account group assign your number range which your created in the above steps: Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 115 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation Account Group of Vendors Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Vendors) PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Vendor AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Vendor Master DataÆ Define Account Groups with Screen Layout (Vendors) Transaction Code: OBD3 Database Table: T077K, T077Y Click on





to SPRO screen.

Define Screen Layout per Company Code (Vendors) PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Vendor AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Vendor Master DataÆ Define Screen Layout per Company Code (Vendors) Transaction Code: OB24 Database Table: T079K Click on


- 116 -



Version ECC 6.0



to SPRO screen.

- 117 -


Version ECC 6.0 Create Number Ranges for Vendor Accounts PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Vendor AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Vendor Master DataÆ Create Number Ranges for Vendor Accounts Transaction Code: XKN1 Click on

(IM Activity),

(Change Intervals ) button.

so will take you to screen here click on It will take to another screen in this screen click on screen.

Now pres enter key or click on

(Insert Interval) button so it will display following

insert button. So it will take the entry to main screen.

- 118 -




to SPRO screen.

- 119 -


Version ECC 6.0 Assign Number Ranges to Vendor Account Groups PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Vendor AccountsÆ Master DataÆ Preparations for Creating Vendor Master DataÆ Assign Number Ranges to Vendor Account Groups Transaction Code: OBAS Database Table: T077K Click on

(IM Activity), click on

button so it display following small window.

Enter your Account group and pres enter or continue button so your account group will display on the top of screen as follow:

Against to your customer account group assign your number range which your created in the above steps: Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 120 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 121 -


Version ECC 6.0 CONTROLLING Maintain Controlling Area PATH: SPROÆ Controlling Æ General Controlling Æ Organization Æ Maintain Controlling Area. Transaction Code: OKKP Database Table: T001, TKA00, TKA01, TKA02, TKA07, TKA09, TKT09, TKVS, TKVST Click on

(IM Activity), select “Maintain Controlling Area” click on

It take to another screen, here click on Now click on

button or pres enter key

it will take to following screen. button so it will display following small window.

Enter your company code and pres enter button or click on continue key. So it will copy few parameters to this screen form company code parameters as follow.

- 122 -


Version ECC 6.0

The other parameters we have to maintain as follow:

Click this to maintain

Now pres on save button

and pres on save button so it will display following dialogue box:

- 123 -


Version ECC 6.0

Just pres enter key or pres on yes button it will save automatically. Now double click on “Assignment of company code” at left side as in follow window:

Now click on

Now pres on save button

button and assign your company code as follow:

.

Now double click on “Activate Components/Control Indicators” at left side as I shown in following window:

- 124 -


Version ECC 6.0

It will take to another screen here pres on have active all of them as follow:

. In this screen nun of the components will be in active. So we

Click this to maintain


to save the activity, it display the following information window:

- 125 -


Version ECC 6.0 And go back

to SPRO screen.

- 126 -


Version ECC 6.0 Maintain Number Ranges for Controlling Documents PATH: SPROÆ Controlling Æ General Controlling Æ Organization Æ Maintain Number Ranges for Controlling Documents. Transaction Code: KANK Click on

(IM Activity),

In above window enter your Controlling Area and pres on Maintain Groups button So it will take to following screen:

In above window go to mane bar “Group + Insert” it will display following window:

- 127 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above window enter text and number range and pres enter key or click on insert the top of main window as follow:

button so it will appear on

Select the check box and double click number range objects as follow (when you double click on each number range objects the color of each object will change to blue from black)

Like above do for all number objects. Now pres on

button which appears at top of the screen.

So your all number range objects will assign to your number range as follow:

- 128 -


Version ECC 6.0



to SPRO screen.

Maintain Versions PATH: SPROÆ Controlling Æ General Controlling Æ Organization Æ Maintain Versions. Transaction Code: OKEQ Click on

(IM Activity),

- 129 -


Version ECC 6.0 Select Version 0 and double click on “Settings for Each Fiscal Year”. It will display following screen:

In this window enter your controlling area and pres enter or click on continue key.

It will display another window click on

.

- 130 -


Version ECC 6.0

Enter above parameters and Click on save button

to save the activity so it will display the following window:

In the above window pres “YES”:

- 131 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window type “LP01” as Output Device and pres enter button or click on continue button:

pres enter button or click on continue button:

- 132 -


Version ECC 6.0 Now click on

button and go back

to SPRO screen.

- 133 -


Version ECC 6.0 PROFIT CENTER ACCOUNTING A profit center is an organizational unit in accounting that reflects a management-oriented structure of the organization for the purpose of internal control. You can analyze operating results for profit centers using either the cost-of-sales or the period accounting approach. By calculating the fixed capital as well, you can use your profit centers as investment centers. Profit center Accounting at the profit center level is based on costs and revenues. These are assigned statistically by multiple parallel updating to all logistical activities and other allocations of relevance for a profit center. The exchange of goods and services between profit centers can be valuated using the same valuation approach as in financial accounting or another approach The master data of a profit center includes the name of the profit center, the controlling area it is assigned to, and the profit center’s period of validity, as well as information about the person responsible for the profit center, the profit center’s assignment to a node of the standard hierarchy, and data required for communication (address, telephone number and so on). Every profit center is assigned to the organizational unit controlling area. This assignment is necessary because Profit Center Accounting displays values in G/L accounts. The system transfers all the data to Profit Center Accounting together with the G/L account to which the data was originally posted. You can only aggregate data of this structure by using the same • chart of accounts • fiscal year variant • currency Maintain Controlling Area Settings PATH: SPROÆ Controlling Æ Profit Center Accounting Æ Basic SettingsÆ Controlling Area SettingsÆ Maintain Controlling Area Settings. Click on

(IM Activity),

- 134 -


Version ECC 6.0



to SPRO screen.

- 135 -


Version ECC 6.0 Create Dummy Profit Center The dummy profit center is the default profit center to which data is posted when the corresponding object has not been assigned to a profit center. You can find out which objects are not assigned to profit centers by analyzing the postings assigned to the profit center. You can also assess or distribute data from the dummy profit center to the desired profit centers. It may happen that some objects in your system are inadvertently left without an assignment to a profit center. In this case, postings to accounts which are defined as revenue or cost elements are assigned to the dummy profit center of the controlling area to which the object posted to belongs. This ensures that your internal and financial accounting data are reconciled. You should not assign data intentionally to your dummy profit center for the purpose of allocating it later. If desired, define a separate "allocation profit center" for this purpose. PATH: SPROÆ Controlling Æ Profit Center Accounting Æ Master DataÆ Profit CenterÆ Create Dummy Profit Center Transaction Code: KE59 Click on

(IM Activity), the following window will display:

Double click on “EC-PCA: Create Dummy Profit Center” or select that and click on

Type 1000 number as Dummy Profit center and click on Basic Data or pres enter key.

- 136 -

button.


Version ECC 6.0

Maintain above parameters. Click on save button

to save the activity, and back to SPRO screen.

Define Profit Center PATH: SPROÆ Controlling Æ Profit Center Accounting Æ Master DataÆ Profit CenterÆ Define Profit Center Transaction Code: KE51 Click on

(IM Activity), the following window will display:

Double click on “EC-PCA: Create Profit Center” or select that and click on

- 137 -

button.


Version ECC 6.0

In Profit center field any number and click on Master Data button, it will take to following screen:

After maintaining above all parameters click on

Active Button. So it will save automatically.

Note: like above process you can create any number of profit centers as per client or project requirement.

- 138 -


Version ECC 6.0 Scenario in General Ledger Accounting The scenario combines Customizing settings from different business views. In these Customizing settings, you specify which posting data is transferred from different application components in General Ledger Accounting, such as cost center update or profit center update. For each scenario, the system transfers the posting data relevant for General Ledger Accounting from the actual and plan documents. Overview of the Scenarios Delivered by SAP Scenario Cost center update Preparation for consolidation Business area Profit center update Segment reporting Cost of sales accounting

Fields Filled Cost center Sender cost center Trading partner Transaction type Business area Trading partner business area Profit center Partner profit center Profit center Segment Partner segment Functional area Partner functional area

Technical Field Name RCNTR SCNTR RASSC RMVCT RBUSA SBUSA PPRCTR PRCTR PRCTR PSEGMENT SEGMENT RFAREA SFAREA

You have to set up cost of sales accounting. The Functional Area field is not filled automatically by the assignment of the scenario to your ledger.

Assign Scenarios and Customer Fields to Ledgers PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ LedgersÆ LedgerÆ Assign Scenarios and Customer Fields to Ledgers Database Table: FAGL_LEDGER_SCEN Click on

(IMG Activity),

- 139 -


Version ECC 6.0 Select your ledger and double click on Scenarios so it will display another screen now click on

Click on this F4 function to assign scenarios


to save the activity, it will display the following information window:

Just pres enter key or click on continue button and back to first screen. Now select your another ledger.

- 140 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

Select your ledger and double click on Scenarios so it will display another screen now click on


to save the activity, it will display the following information window:

Just pres enter key or click on continue button and back to SPRO screen.

- 141 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

- 142 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 143 -


Version ECC 6.0 DOCUMENT SPLITTING Document splitting allows you to display documents using a differentiated representation. In the representation, line items are split according to selected dimensions. In this way, you can draw up complete financial statements for the selected dimensions at any time. Using the document splitting procedure, you can also create a segmented display of a (partial) balance sheet according to a set of legal requirements (for example, IAS) or according to areas of responsibility. In addition, you can allocate at the time of posting additional costs (such as realized or valuated exchange rate differences) to the CO account assignment objects to which the costs relate. Assets can also be subsequently capitalized at the time of posting. Features You can use the document splitting procedure to split up line items for selected dimensions (such as receivable lines by profit center) or to effect a zero balance setting in the document for selected dimensions (such as segment). This generates additional clearing lines in the document. Document Splitting Process For document splitting to be possible, the system classifies the individual line items as well as the documents. This takes place using your settings in Customizing. Depending on how a document is classified, the splitting rule selected for a document specifies how the document is split and for which line items. SAP delivers a set of standard splitting rules. You can also define your own rules. Sub functions of Document Splitting The following functions are part of document splitting: 1. Passive document splitting 2. Active document splitting Passive document splitting The system creates a reference to existing account assignments. These account assignments are used as the basis for line items to be split. The system applies all account assignments that you have defined as document splitting characteristics in Customizing. If you have set the Zero Balance Setting indicator for the document splitting characteristic, the system then creates any necessary clearing lines to ensure that the characteristics produce a balance of zero in each document. Passive document splitting comprises all document splitting processes, for example, clearing processes that are determined program-internal and that you cannot control with settings in Customizing. The processes of passive document splitting are used for the processes of active document splitting and thus the splitting of the document itself. By contrast, active document splitting comprises all processes used to split the document itself. You control active document splitting using settings in Customizing. In these processes, the system creates a relationship to existing account assignments after document entry. Let us suppose you want to enter a document to clear two receivables. The account assignments of the line items of receivables are transferred into the line item to be created. The line items can be split. The system applies all account assignments that you have defined as document splitting characteristics in Customizing. The system edits the following processes in passive document splitting depending on the business process to split the document: • Clearing Receivable clearing items are created here that form the basis for the line items to be split

- 144 -


Version ECC 6.0 • Invoice Reference A reference to one or more invoices is created here. The reference results from the document entry by entering the invoice. The invoice in turn forms the basis for the line items to be split. • Zero Balance Setting per Document (Final Process): You can define document splitting characteristics for the general ledger as relevant for the balance sheet. To do this, you set the Zero Balance Setting indicator for the characteristic. In this case, the system ensures that those characteristics produce a balance of zero in each document by creating clearing lines. You can then create (partial) balance sheets on these characteristics. If you have partner characteristics in the document, these are also filled. Partner characteristics describe the sender and receiver relationships within a posting item. Two different procedures are used when creating clearing lines: If the partner characteristics are filled in the documents (for example, transfer of goods), then the document balance is formed on the characteristics used in the balance sheet, and their partner characteristics. The clearing lines are created in accordance with this balance since the partner assignments already exist. If the partner characteristics are not filled in the documents then the system forms two-sided clearing lines according to an amount procedure. The generated clearing lines then receive the partner assignment from the corresponding clearing line. Active document splitting In this sub function, the line items are split according to the settings in Customizing (the classification of the document and the splitting rule assigned to the document). Active document splitting comprises all processes used to split the document itself. You control active document splitting using settings in Customizing. By contrast, you cannot control passive document splitting. This is defined program-internal and comprises all other document splitting processes such as clearing processes. Active document splitting comprises the following functions: The system splits the line items according to the classification of the document for a business transaction and the assigned splitting rule. You define the classifications and the splitting rule in Customizing and can adjust them there. The splitting rule describes the relationships between sender and receiver of document splitting characteristics based on classified posting lines. You can use document splitting only for documents that can be uniquely assigned to a business transaction. Example: You want to enter a payment and an invoice in a document. However, the document cannot be assigned uniquely to a business transaction. The document cannot be posted. You can also define splitting rules across company codes. The company code clearing lines get the account assignments from the related company codes.

Example 1: Invoice A vendor invoice is entered with the following items: Posting Key 31 40 40

Account

Segment

Amount

Payables Expense Expense

0001 0002

100.0040.00 60.00

- 145 -


Version ECC 6.0 Document splitting then creates the following document in the general ledger view: Posting Key 31 31 40 40

Account

Segment

Payables Payables Expense Expense

0001 0002 0001 0002

Amount 40.0060.0040.00 60.00

Example 2: Payment The payment for the above vendor invoice then contains the following items when entered (PK = posting key): PK 50 25 50 50

Account Bank Payables Cash Discount Received Cash Discount Received

Segment

Amount 95.00100.00

0001

2.00-

0002

3.00-

Document splitting then creates the following document in the general ledger view: PK 50 50 25 25 50 50

Account Bank Bank Payables Payables Cash Discount Received Cash Discount Received

Segment 0001 0002 0001 0002

Amount 38.0057.0040.00 60.00

0001

2.00-

0002

3.00-

Overview of Document Splitting Process Business Transaction: Payment with Residual Items without Invoice Reference Two receivables of EUR 600 and EUR 400 are to be cleared. This example shows the program-internal process flow and the processes of active and passive document splitting. Process Flow:

- 146 -


Version ECC 6.0

Business Process: Payment (Entry View)

Initial situation: Business process

I.

Account

Amount

AcctAssgmt/ PartnerAssgmt

Bank

900

S3

Receivable

1000-

Residual item

100

Item Category

Interpretation of Customizing

Derivation of business transaction (for example, payment/standard) Assignment of item category Check validity of item categories for business transaction

Bank

900

Receivable

1000-

02000 (customer)

Residual item

100

02000 (customer)

- 147 -

S3

04000 (cash account)


Version ECC 6.0 II.

Passive Document Splitting for Clearing

Passive document splitting: the amounts are determined program-internal from the original document Cannot be set in Customizing Creating receivable clearing lines

III.

Bank

900

S3


Receivable

400-

S1

02000 (customer)

Receivable

600-

S2

02000 (customer)

Residual item

100

Bank

900

S3


Receivable

400-

S1

02000 (customer)

Receivable

600-

S2

02000 (customer)

Residual item

40

S1

02000 (customer)

Residual item

60

S2

02000 (customer)

02000 (customer)

Active Document Splitting

Active document splitting since it can be set in Customizing Residual items without invoice reference are split based on the receivable clearing items (passively) that were split in the previous step

This is an example of document splitting without residual items. Residual items with invoice reference are split passively!

IV.

Passive Document Splitting: Zero Balance Setting

Passive document splitting (in Customizing you can only set that zero balances are calculated.) After the previous process steps, a balance remains on account assignments S1, S2, and S3. Additional clearing lines need to be created. In this way, the partner characteristics are also filled. * Zero balance posting (Free balancing units)

Bank

900

S3


Receivable

400-

S1

02000 (customer)

Receivable

600-

S2

02000 (customer)

Residual item

40

S1

02000 (customer)

Residual item

60

S2

02000 (customer)

Clearing

360-

S3 / S1

01001*

Clearing

360

S1 / S3

01001*

Clearing

540-

S3 / S2

01001*

- 148 -


Version ECC 6.0 Clearing

- 149 -

540

S2 / S3

01001*


Version ECC 6.0 Classify G/L Accounts for Document Splitting PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ General Ledger Accounting (New)Æ Business TransactionsÆ Document SplittingÆ Classify G/L Accounts for Document Splitting. Database Table: T8G17 Click on

(IMG Activity), it will display the following small window.

Enter your company code and pres enter key or click on continue button, so it will take u to another screens follow now pres on

button.

Enter the above specifications. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 150 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 151 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of G/L Account Definition G/L account master data in the chart of accounts area contains information about the G/L account that is valid for all company codes. The chart of accounts area also contains data that controls how a G/L account is created in the company code-specific area. To make certain that company codes using the same chart of accounts can also use the same G/L accounts, a master record is created for the G/L account in the chart of accounts and in the company code-specific areas. Structure The chart of accounts: The account number and account name (short and long text) The indicator that specifies whether the account is a balance sheet account or an P&L statement account. At the start of a new fiscal year, the balance of a balance sheet account is carried forward to itself. With P&L statement accounts, you must specify the account to which the profit or loss is carried forward at the end of a fiscal year. The account group: With the account group, you group similar accounts together and control the creating and changing of master records. They control. The account number interval in which the account number must lie. The screen layout for creating G/L accounts in the company code-specific area. This means that you can define whether fields require an entry, may have an entry, or are hidden when creating or changing a master record in the company code-specific area. Balances in Local Currency Only: When creating a G/L account in a company code, you can decide whether the transaction figures should only be kept in the local currency for this account. You have to set this indicator for clearing accounts you use to clear line items in various currencies with one local currency amount and without posting any exchange rate differences that may occur. • Do not set this indicator for A/P A/R reconciliation accounts. You have to set the indicator for the following accounts: • Cash discount clearing accounts • Clearing accounts for goods receipt / invoice receipt The indicator is usually set for the following balance sheet accounts: • Accounts without open item management in which no foreign currencies are managed • You manage a clearing account for goods received and invoices received. This account is posted to menually. You post the incoming invoices in an invoice currency and the goods received in all cases in the local currency. Defining the Tax Category In tax accounts, you can specify the type of tax on sales/purchases (input or output tax) that can be posted to the account. In rare cases, it is useful to assign a certain tax code to an account. You enter the tax code in the master record in this case. Only this tax code can be used when posting to this account. If a G/L account is not tax relevant, you may make no specification in this field. For more information on sales tax and other taxes in your system, see the documentation FI General Topics. Defining "Posting without Tax Allowed":

- 152 -


Version ECC 6.0 If you select this indicator, no tax code needs to be entered when posting to this account. If a tax code is entered, it is checked according to the tax category for this account. You use this indicator if taxable and non-taxable postings are to be entered to an account at the same time. In such a case, you normally set up your own tax code to allow for non-taxable transactions. However, this is not possible - for example - for tax entry with jurisdiction code, since no jurisdiction code can be specified for customers abroad. You would then allow postings without tax codes for the corresponding expense or revenue accounts. This indicator is not needed for invoice verification postings, since the account assignments are generally derived from the purchase order. The indicator is therefore not checked by the system for these postings. For items with no tax code, no tax information is created, and they are not contained in the tax report lists. Define "Reconciliation Account for Account Type": You use this field to indicate G/L accounts as being reconciliation accounts. For each sub ledger account, you must keep at least one reconciliation account in the general ledger. When you post to an account in the sub ledger, the system automatically posts to the corresponding reconciliation account. The "Receivables from goods and services" account is an example of a reconciliation account for customers. Enter Customer in the Reconciliation account for account type field. Enter a Vendor in this field for a vendor reconciliation account. Using the reconciliation account procedure, it is possible to create a balance sheet and a profit and loss statement at any time, since the amounts posted to sub ledger accounts are also posted automatically in the general ledger. During regular reconciliation, you check whether the balance of the reconciliation account matches the balance of the corresponding sub ledger account. You define reconciliation accounts by specifying in the G/L account master record the account type (such as fixed assets, vendor or customer) for which the account is to be used. In this way, the account can only be assigned to accounts in the corresponding sub ledger. You set the assignment of the sub ledger account to a reconciliation account in the master record of the sub ledger account. You cannot post to reconciliation accounts menually . You have created a reconciliation account "Receivables" for accounts receivable. You must specify the account number of the reconciliation account in the master records of the customer accounts. The system checks whether the named reconciliation account is permitted for the account type "customer". Defining "Open Item Management”: If you set the "Open item management" indicator in the master record for an account, the line items in this account is marked as open or cleared. The balance of an account with open item management is equal to the balance of the open items. General ledger accounts are kept with open item management if you need to check whether there is an offsetting posting for a given business transaction. You should use open item management for bank clearing accounts, clearing accounts for goods receipt/invoice receipt, and salary clearing accounts. Bank accounts, however, do not use open item management. If you subsequently define open item management for a G/L account, this entry only applies to the items which are posted afterwards. At the date of the change, the account must display a zero balance. Also, when canceling this indicator, the balance must be zero. You therefore have to clear the remaining open items before making the change in the master record. Defining "Line Item Display":

- 153 -


Version ECC 6.0 If you set the "Line item display" indicator in the master record for an account, all line items that have been posted to this account are displayed if they have not been archived. You use line item display to display the document line items from the account. For line item display, the system lists all the line items for an account. For accounts with line item display, the system uses special indices to define the link between the account and the document. For accounts with many transactions, a corresponding number of indices must be defined and read for line item display. This means that when posting items to such accounts and displaying line items, additional storage space and system time are required. Therefore, you should not use line item display for the following accounts: • • • •

Reconciliation accounts (detailed information is contained in the sub ledger) Sales revenue accounts (detailed information in the Sales and Distribution application module) Material accounts (detailed information in the "Materials Management" application module) Tax accounts (detailed information is not needed since tax data is contained and checked in the document).

Defining the Field Status Group: You use this field to define which fields are displayed when you post accounting transactions to a G/L account. A field may have one of the following statuses: hidden (suppressed) Entry required (required field) Ready for input (optional field) Creation of Zero Balance GL account PATH: Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting Æ General LedgerÆ Master Records Æ G/L Accounts Æ Individual ProcessingÆ FS00 - Centrally. Transaction Code: FS00

In the above screen enter G/L Account no, Company Code and click on create

- 154 -

button.


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen with first tab “Type/Description” give required parameters and go to tab “Control Data”

- 155 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen maintain required parameters and go to another tab “Create/Bank/Interest”

In above maintain parameters. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Define Zero-Balance Clearing Account

In the standard system, you can balance each business area to zero by means of adjustment postings. You can use the balance sheet adjustment to do this. When you post a document, the system checks the business area balance and if this is not zero it marks this document for the balance sheet adjustment. Program SAPF180A reads the marked documents, calculates the adjustment postings required, and updates these in its own database tables. A second program, SAPF180, reads the adjustment posting tables and on this basis posts the accounting documents required. The adjustment postings are posted to a clearing account. This account fulfills the function of a receivable or payable from a business area against all other business areas. •

The balance sheet adjustment generates summarized transfer postings to the clearing account.

•

You can run a balance sheet adjustment as often as you require.

•

You cannot however run the balance sheet adjustment without first activating the business area balance sheets for the company code in question.

- 156 -


Version ECC 6.0 •

You can display the calculated adjustment postings for each individual document from the document display.

PATH: PROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ General Ledger Accounting (New)Æ Business TransactionsÆ Document SplittingÆ Define Zero-Balance Clearing Account. Database Table: T8G30B Click on

(IMG Activity), it will display the following window.

Select the line and double click on “Accounts” under Dialog Structure.

The above small window will display so enter your chart of accounts and pres enter or click on continue button. It will take u to another screen there click on

button.

Use this F4 function to assign GL account

- 157 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above by using F4 function assign Zero Balance GL account which you created. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 158 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 159 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of SBI Main Bank GL account PATH: Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting Æ General LedgerÆ Master Records Æ G/L Accounts Æ Individual ProcessingÆ FS00 - Centrally. Transaction Code: FS00

In the above screen enter G/L Account number, Company Code and pres Create button

After entering above parameters go to next tab “Control Data”

- 160 -


Version ECC 6.0

After entering above parameters go to next tab “Create/Bank/Interest”


to save the activity

- 161 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of SBI Cheque Deposit GL account Enter new G/L Account number in G/L Account field and pres create button

Specify the parameters as the following screen:


- 162 -

.


Version ECC 6.0


- 163 -




Creation of SBI Cheque Issue GL account Enter new G/L Account number in G/L Account field and pres create button

Specify the parameters as the following screen:


- 164 -

.


Version ECC 6.0


- 165 -




Define House Banks PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆ Bank AccountsÆFiscal Define House Banks Transaction code: FI12 Database Table: T012, T012D, T012K, T012T Click on


Enter your company code and pres enter key or click on continue key. It will take u to another screen there click on

After giving above parameters click on

.

button.

- 166 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window give complete address details and pres enter or pres on continue button. Now save the screen.

Double click on “Bank Accounts” under Dialog Structure. It will take you to another screen there click on .

Click on this button for next entry

Click on this F4 function to select GL account

- 167 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen give all the required specifications. Click on F2 function of G/L field to assign relevant GL account which we already created and click on next button for next entry.

Click on this button for next entry


In the above screen give all the required specifications. Click on F2 function of G/L field to assign relevant GL account which we already created and click on next button for next entry.


In the above screen give all the required specifications. Click on F2 function of G/L field to assign relevant GL account which we already created. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

- 168 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 169 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Number Ranges for Checks PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆ Business TransactionsÆ Outgoing PaymentsÆ Automatic Outgoing PaymentsÆ Payment MediaÆ Check ManagementÆ Define Number Ranges for Checks. Transaction code: FCHI

Click on

(IMG Activity),

Click on this change button

In the above screen specify above 3 parameters and pres on Change button

.

It will take you to another screen now click on this create button Lot”window:

. So it will display following “Create

Pres enter key or click continue button and again now click on this create button

- 170 -

.


Version ECC 6.0

Pres enter key or click continue button so the entries will insert to main window. Click on save button


to SPRO screen.

Assign House Bank details to relevant GL Accounts PATH: Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting Æ General LedgerÆ Master Records Æ G/L Accounts Æ Individual ProcessingÆ FS00 - Centrally. Transaction Code: FS00 Enter the “SBI main bank” GL account number in “G/L account” field and click on Edit button

Go to “Create/Bank/interest” tab. As in following screen assign House Bank details.

- 171 -


Version ECC 6.0

Save the screen. Enter the “sbi cheque deposit a/c” GL account number in “G/L account” field and click on Edit button


- 172 -


Version ECC 6.0

Save the screen. Enter the “sbi cheque issue a/c” GL account number in “G/L account” field and click on Edit button


- 173 -


Version ECC 6.0



to SPRO screen.

- 174 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of Vendors (Sundry Creditors) Reconciliation Account PATH: Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting Æ General LedgerÆ Master Records Æ G/L Accounts Æ Individual ProcessingÆ FS00 - Centrally. Transaction Code: FS00 Enter G/L Account number, Company Code and pres on Create Button

The following screen will appear:

Enter the above parameters.

- 175 -

.


Version ECC 6.0 Select next tab “Control Data”

Enter the above parameters. Select next tab “Create/Bank/Interest”

Enter the above parameters: Click on save button

to save the activity.

- 176 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of Customers (Sundry Debtors) Reconciliation Account PATH: Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting Æ General LedgerÆ Master Records Æ G/L Accounts Æ Individual ProcessingÆ FS00 - Centrally. Transaction Code: FS00 Enter G/L Account number, Company Code and pres on Create Button

The following screen will appears:


- 177 -

.


Version ECC 6.0



to save the activity and go back to SPRO screen.

- 178 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 179 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of Customer Master Record PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ Accounts ReceivableÆ Master RecordsÆ Maintain CentrallyÆ XD01 – Create. Transaction Code: XD01 Database tables: KNA1, KNB1, KNB5, KNVP, KNVV, KNVD When you enter into the transaction it will display the following box.

Maintain the above parameters and pres enter key or click on continue button.

- 180 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above screen under “Address” tab we maintain full address details. Now go to another tab “Payment Transactions”

- 181 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen maintain customer bank details. Now click

button at the top of window.

It will display company code related tabs as follow:

Click on F4 function to assign GL account

In the above screen under “Account Management” tab assign Customer Reconciliation GL Account which we created and maintain parameters as above.

- 182 -



button so it will display sales area related tabs as follow:

Under “Sales” tab:

Maintain all above parameters under “Sales” tab. Go to “Shipping” tab and maintain parameters as follow:

- 183 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen under “shipping” tab after maintaining parameters go to “Billing Documents” tab

Now under this tab maintain above parameters. Click on save button


- 184 -


Version ECC 6.0 Once u click on save button it display the following information and it contain the customer number.

To go back

to SPRO screen.

- 185 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creating Vendor Master Record PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ Accounts PayableÆ Master RecordsÆ Maintain CentrallyÆ XK01 – Create. Transaction code: XK01 Database Tables: LFA1, LFB1, LFM1, LFM2, LFBK, LFB6 When you enter into the transaction it will display the following window.

Maintain above parameters and pres enter key so it will take to another screen.

- 186 -


Version ECC 6.0

After entering above parameters pres on enter button two times so it will take to another screen

In above screen we maintain the vendor bank details. Now pres enter button so it will take to another screen:

- 187 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above screen assign vendor reconciliation Account and other parameters and pres enter button 3 times so it will take to another screen.

- 188 -


Version ECC 6.0

After entering above parameters just pres enter 2 times so it will display following window:

Click on YES button so your vendor will be created.

It will display the above message at the bottom of the screen with vendor number.

- 189 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 190 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 191 -


Version ECC 6.0 NOTE: Before start posting create all G/L accounts in your company code as I given the table at the end of this book. G/L Posting F-02 PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆPostingÆF-02 - General Posting Transaction code: F-02 In the following entry we are going to post is an G/L related “Office Rent paid”. For this the normal G/L entry is: Rent/Rats A/C Dr 25000/SBI Cheque issue A/C 25000/It will display the following screen:

In the above screen: 1) Document Date : The date is when transaction is performed 2) Posting date : The date is you are posting this entry or document 3) Type : Document Type 4) Company Code : In which Company code this Document is being raised 5) Period : In which month this Document is being raised 6) Currency/Rate : Document Currency 7) PstKy : Posting key of 1st line item 8) Account : Debit G/L Account Number In the above screen maintain required parameters and pres enter button. So it will take you to following screen:

- 192 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen: 1) Amount 2) Text 3) PstKy 4) Account Now click on

: Document Amount : Description of the document : G/L Credit Posting Key : Credit G/L Account button so it will display the following screen:

- 193 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen maintain all parameters and pres enter button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen give “ * ” symbol in “Amount” Coolum and “ + ” symbol in “Text” Coolum and pres enter button so it copy the values and Text from previous screen. No go to Menu bar “Document - Simulate” so it will display the following screen:

- 194 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen you can watch the entry. To post the entry either click on save button or go to Menu bar “Document - Post” While posting it will gives you the following message.

In the message it gives Document number for your entry from number interval which you had given to SA document type. Now back to easy access screen. Report 1 - Display/Change Line Items Note: The above entry will get update with all ledgers like Leading ledger and Non-Leading ledger. This you can view in following 3 reports. PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General LedgerÆ AccountÆ FBL3N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction Code: FBL3N By the above transaction code it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter you company code, select radio button “All Items” and click on Executive button. So it will display the following report.

- 195 -


Version ECC 6.0

View it and back to easy access screen. Report 2 - FAGLB03 - Display Balances (New) Note: The above entry will get update with all ledgers like Leading ledger and Non-Leading ledger. This you can view in following 3 reports. PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General LedgerÆ AccountÆ FAGLB03 - Display Balances (New) Transaction Code: FAGLB03 By the above transaction code it will display the following screen:

- 196 -


Version ECC 6.0 2. Click on this Multiple Selection button 5. Click on this executive button 1. Click on this button and select your Non-Leading ledger

3. Select your G/L accounts from which you want to draw reports

4. Click on this executive button

In the above screen select G/L Accounts for which you want to draw the report and executive the report so it will show the following report: (Follow the steps as I shown above boxes)

Now double click on above Debit, Credit, Balance amounts, so it will show detail report as follow: (I showen only Balance one)

- 197 -


Version ECC 6.0

Back to easy screen. Note: The above report is shown on “Z2” Non-Leading Ledger. Now you can change the Non-Leading Ledger to another (Z1) and draw the report

Report 3 - FAGLL03 - Display/Change Items (New) Note: The above entry will get update with all ledgers like Leading ledger and Non-Leading ledger. This you can view in following 3 reports. PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General LedgerÆ AccountÆ FAGLL03 - Display/Change Items (New) Transaction Code: FAGLL03 By the above transaction code it will display the following screen:

- 198 -


Version ECC 6.0 2. Select the G/L’s as you required

4. Select executive button 1. Change the ledger as you required

3. Select this Radio Button

In the above screen select the Non-Leading ledger, G/L accounts and executive the activity. So it will show the following screen:

- 199 -


Version ECC 6.0 View the above report and back to easy access screen.

- 200 -


Version ECC 6.0 FB01L - Enter General Posting for Ledger Group PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆPostingÆFB01L - Enter General Posting for Ledger Group Transaction Code: FB01L Here we are posting to a Non-Leading Ledger that is (X2) Here we are posting a “Telephone expenses paid”. For that the following entry will arise: Telephone expenses a/c Dr SBI Cheque Issue a/c

44454/44454/-

Enter into the above transaction:

Enter you Non-Leading Ledger

In the above screen maintain the Document date, Document Type (SA), Company code, Posting date, Currency/Rate, Ledger Grp, PstKy (Posting Key), Account (Your Telephone Expenses G/L a/c number as you created). Once you maintain the above parameters pres enter button so it will display the next screen as below:

- 201 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen give amount for debit item, enter Text, posting key (PstKy) and Cash in hand G/L a/c number in Account field for credit entry. Now pres on

button, so it will display the following screen:

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if don’t create them you can leave blank those fields In the above screen enter Business area, Cot Center, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area and pres enter button so it display the following screen:

- 202 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter “ * “ symbol to Amount field and “ + ” symbol to Text field. No go to Menu bar “Document - Simulate” so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen you can watch the entry. To post the entry either click on save button or go to Menu bar “Document - Post” While posting it will gives you the following message.

- 203 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the message it gives Document number for your entry from number interval which you had given to SA document type. Now back to easy access screen. To view reports go to following transaction: Report 1: FBL3N Report 2: FAGLB03 Report 3: FAGLL03 Report 4: FS10N Executive above reports with Leading and Non-Leading Ledgers (X1, X2)

- 204 -


Version ECC 6.0 Posting G/L Entry with Enjoy Transaction PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆPostingÆFB50 - Enter G/L Account Document Transaction Code: FB50 By this transaction you can post similar nature multiple transactions at a time. With the above transaction the following screen will display:

To simulate click on this Button

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if don’t create them you can leave blank those fields In the above screen you enter multiple debits and a credit and simulate the screen.

In the above screen you can view simulated entry. Now click on save the button to save the entry.

- 205 -


Version ECC 6.0

. After you save the screen it displays the above information with Document number. Back to easy access screen. To view report goes to following transaction: Report 1: FBL3N Report 2: FAGLB03 Report 3: FAGLL03 Report 4: FS10N Executive above reports with Leading and Non-Leading Ledgers (X1, X2) Enter G/L Account Document for Ledger Group PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆPostingÆ FB50L - Enter G/L Account Document for Ledger Group Transaction Code: FB50L By this transaction you can post similar nature multiple transactions at a time. With the above transaction the following screen will display:

Enter your Non-Leading Ledger

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if don’t create them you can leave blank those fields

- 206 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen you enter multiple debits and a credit and simulate the screen.

In the above screen you can view simulated entry. Now click on save the button to save the entry.

After you save the screen it displays the above information with Document number. Back to easy access screen. To view report goes to following transaction: Report 1: FBL3N Report 2: FAGLB03 Report 3: FAGLL03 Report 4: FS10N Executive above reports with Leading and Non-Leading Ledgers (X1, X2)

- 207 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 208 -


Version ECC 6.0 Posting Customer Credit Invoice PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts ReceivableÆDocument EntryF-22 - Invoice – General Transaction code: F-22 With above transaction the following screen appears:

In the above screen enter Document Date, Posting Date, Document Type, Company Code, Currency/Rate, Pstky (Posting Key) and Account (Customer number). After above parameters click on enter button so it display another screen as below:

- 209 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter Amount of invoice, Bus.Area (business area), Text, Pstky (Posting Key) and Account (Sales account number). Once you maintain above all parameters click on enter button, so it display the following screen:

In the above screen give “ * ” to amount field and give “ + ” to Text so it will copy previous screendata to this screen Now click on

button so it will display the following screen:

- 210 -


Version ECC 6.0

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if don’t create them you can leave blank those fields In the above screen maintain required parameters as I showen and pres enter button. Now go to Menu bar (Document + Simulate)

Now go to Menu bar “Document + Post”, so it will post the transaction and give following message:

- 211 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above message is give document number for above transaction from the interval which we maintain for the Document type “DR”. Back to easy access screen. Customer Reports PATH:Æ Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting ÆAccounts Receivable ÆAccountÆ FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items By the above transaction code the following screen displays:

In the above screen select your customer, company code, land select radio button All items, and click on Executive button

so it will display the below screen:

- 212 -


Version ECC 6.0

This red button indicates “Open Items”

In the above screen it shows report as we posted credit invoice. ” indicates “Open Item” that means the invoice is raise on credit based but not cleared (not yet The red symbol “ paid).

- 213 -


Version ECC 6.0 Standard Clearing Credit Customer Invoice PATH:Æ Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting ÆAccounts Receivable Æ Document EntryÆ F-28 - Incoming Payments Transaction code: F-2 By the above transaction code it display following screen:

In the above screen: • Enter Document Date, Posting Date •

Enter Document type, Company code

•

Enter Posting Period, Currency/Rate

•

Enter Account under Bank Data (in this field give SBI Cheque Deposit G/L Account Number)

•

Enter Amount (In this Field Enter the Credit Invoice Amount which you want to clear)

•

Enter Busniess Area, Profit Center

•

Enter Account under Open item Selection (In This field Enter Your Customer Number from whom you received amount)

Once you enter above all parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen: .

- 214 -


Version ECC 6.0

Double click on this amount so it will de-activate

To clear this field should be zero

In the above screen under “Account items” you be having many open items (In Blue color). We have do deselect all other open items (To Deselect items just Double click on other items one by one so they convert into black color) except one which you are going to clear now. Always after maingk changer “Non Assigned” field should be Zero. Not go to Menu bar “Document – Simulate”, so it display the following screen:

To post the entry go to Menu bar “Document - Post”, so it post the entry and shows the following message:

- 215 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen it gives the Clearing document number form DZ document type. Back to easy access screen: Reports PATH:Æ Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting ÆAccounts Receivable ÆAccountÆ FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items By the above transaction code the following screen displays:



- 216 -


Version ECC 6.0

This is your cleared invoice

In the above screen you can view the cleared item. Back to easy access screen.

- 217 -


Version ECC 6.0 Clearing Open Item “Partial Payment” Note: post one open item with transaction code: F-22 (for example I had an open item worth Rs.150000 /-) PATH:Æ Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting ÆAccounts Receivable Æ Document EntryÆ F-28 - Incoming Payments Transaction code: F-28 By the above transaction code it display following screen: Note: In this transaction I am clear 45000 as Partial Payment.

In the above screen maintain all parameters as required as above and pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 218 -


Version ECC 6.0 1. Click on this tab 2. Double click on this field. It will show amount we receiving.

• • • •

In the above screen first go to “Partial Pmt” tab. Under “Account Items” if you have multiple items deselect all other line items except one which you want to clear. Under “Payment amount” it will display full invoice amount so double click on that amount, now automatically it will changes the amount to actual Partial amount which we are suppose to clear today. Not Assigned field will be zero now.

Not go to Menu bar “Document – Simulate”, so it displays the following screen:


In the above screen it gives the Clearing document number form DZ document type. Back to easy access screen:

- 219 -


Version ECC 6.0 Reports PATH:Æ Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting ÆAccounts Receivable ÆAccountÆ FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items By the above transaction code the following screen displays:



- 220 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen you can view the cleared item of Rs.45,000/- as credit item (in SAP the credit entries will be shown by “ - ” symbol at the end of amount for example “Rs.45000-”) Till you clear the balance amount those line items won’t be convert to green symbol. Note: clear the balance amount in normal/Standard clearing and view the report Back to easy access screen.

- 221 -


Version ECC 6.0 Clearing Open Item “Residual Payment” Note: post one open item with transaction code: F-22 (for example I had an open item worth Rs.100000 /-) PATH:Æ Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting ÆAccounts Receivable Æ Document EntryÆ F-28 - Incoming Payments Transaction code: F-28 Note: In this transaction I am clear Rs.60000/- as Partial Payment. By the above transaction code it display following screen:

In the above screen maintain app required parameters as I shown above and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 222 -


Version ECC 6.0

1. Select this tab (Residual Items) 2. Double click on this button so it will show only balance to be received amount

• • • •

In the above screen first go to “Res.items” tab. Under “Account Items” if you have multiple items deselect all other line items except one which you want to clear. Under “Payment amount” it will display full invoice amount so double click on that amount, now automatically it will changes the amount to actual Partial amount which we are suppose to clear today. Not Assigned field will be zero now.



- 223 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen it gives the Clearing document number form DZ document type. Back to easy access screen.

Reports PATH:Æ Accounting ÆFinancial Accounting ÆAccounts Receivable ÆAccountÆ FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction code: FBL5N - Display/Change Line Items By the above transaction code the following screen displays:



- 224 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen it will we can view it has cleared the whole credit invoice entry of Rs.100000 and showes only balance of Rs.40000/- only. It won’t show the cleared amount of Rs.60000/- in the report that we have to mention in text only. Now clear the balance in normal/Standard clearing of Rs.40000/- and view the entry in report. Back to easy access screen.

- 225 -


Version ECC 6.0 Posting Vendor Credit Invoice PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆDocument EntryÆF-43 - Invoice – General Transaction Code: F-43 With above transaction code it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter Document Date, Document type (KR), Company code, Posting Date, Currency/Rate, PstKy (Posting key), Account (Vendor number). After you enter above parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 226 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen enter Amount (Invoice Amount), text for credit information, Enter PstKy (Debit G/L posting key), Account (Purchases G/L account number). Once you enter the above parameters pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen for Amount field enter “ * ” symbol and for Text field enter “ + ” symbol and pres enter button and click on

button so it will display the following scereen:

- 227 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter those parameters and click on enter button. Now go to Menu bar “Document + simulate”, it will display the following screen:

In the above screen you can view the G/L entry. Now go to Menu Bar “Document + Post” so it will post the entry and give the following message.

In the above message it displays the Document number for the above entry from KR number range. Back to easy access screen.

- 228 -


Version ECC 6.0 Report on Vendor Line Items PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆAccountÆFBL1N - Display/Change Line Items. Transaction Code: FBL1N By above transaction code the following screen display: Hear you can select specific vendor also

In the above screen select radio button “All items” and click on screen:

View line items and back to easy access screen.

- 229 -

or cick F8 button so it will display the following


Version ECC 6.0 Standard Vendor Line Item Clearing PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆDocument Entry ÆOutgoing PaymentÆF-53 – Post. Transaction Code: F-53 By above transaction code the following screen displays:

In above screen maintain Document date, Posting date, Document type, Company code, Period, Currency/Rate, under Bank date maintain Account (SBI Cheque issue G/L a/c number), Amount (Amount which you are clearing now), text, under Open Item Selection maintain Account (give your Vendor number) and pres enter button, so it will display the following screen:

- 230 -


Version ECC 6.0

• • •

In the above screen under “Standard” tab. Under “Account Items” if you have multiple items deselect all other line items except one which you want to clear. Not Assigned field will be zero now.


To post the entries go to Menu bar “Document - Post”, so it post the entry and shows the following message:

In the above message it gives an Vendor Clearing document number for KZ document number. Back to easy access screen.

- 231 -


Version ECC 6.0 Report with Standard Vendor Credit Invoice Clearing PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆAccountÆFBL1N - Display/Change Line Items. Transaction Code: FBL1N By above transaction code the following screen display: Hear you can select specific vendor also


- 232 -



Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen you can view cleared credit invoice. Back to easy access screen. Partial Payment Clearing to Vendor Line Item PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆDocument Entry ÆOutgoing PaymentÆF-53 – Post. Transaction Code: F-53 Note: for this clearing post one Vendor Open Item for Rs.300000/By above transaction code the following screen displays:

In above screen maintain Document date, Posting date, Document type, Company code, Period, Currency/Rate, under Bank date maintain Account (SBI Cheque issue G/L a/c number), Amount (Amount which you are clearing now), text, under Open Item Selection maintain Account (give your Vendor number) and pres enter button, so it will display the following screen:

- 233 -


Version ECC 6.0

Double click on this so it will display the clearing amount

Deselect these lint items

• • • •

In the above screen under “Partial Pmt” tab. Under “Account Items” if you have multiple items, deselect all other line items except one which you want to clear. Under “Payment amount” it will display full invoice amount so double click on that amount, now automatically it will changes the amount to actual Partial amount which we are suppose to clear today. Not Assigned field will be zero now.



- 234 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above message it gives a Vendor Clearing document number for KZ document number. Back to easy access screen. Report with Standard Vendor Credit Invoice Clearing PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆAccountÆFBL1N - Display/Change Line Items. Transaction Code: FBL1N By above transaction code the following screen display: Hear you can select specific vendor also


- 235 -



Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen we can view Rs.300000- /- with Document type KR and Rs.175000/- with Document Type KZ. Above it shows against Rs.300000- - invoice we cleared Rs.175000/-.but booth line items lies at one place till we clear rest of the payment. With “Standard clearing” clear the rest of the amount (That is Rs.1250000/-) also then total invoice related line items will be cleared, View the report again after standard clearing. Back to easy access screen.

Residual Payment Clearing to Vendor Line Item PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆDocument Entry ÆOutgoing PaymentÆF-53 – Post. Transaction Code: F-53 Note: for this clearing post one Vendor Open Item for Rs.200000/By above transaction code the following screen displays:

- 236 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above screen maintain Document date, Posting date, Document type, Company code, Period, Currency/Rate, under Bank date maintain Account (SBI Cheque issue G/L a/c number), Amount (Amount which you are clearing now), text, under Open Item Selection maintain Account (give your Vendor number) and pres enter button, so it will display the following screen;

- 237 -


Version ECC 6.0

• • • •

In the above screen under “Residual item” tab. Under “Account Items” if you have multiple items, deselect all other line items except one which you want to clear. Under “Payment amount” it will display blank field against the invoice which we are clearing now, so double click on that amount, now automatically it will changes the amount to actual Partial amount which we are suppose to clear today. Not Assigned field will be zero now.



In the above message it gives a Vendor Clearing document number for KZ document number. Back to easy access screen.

Report with Standard Vendor Credit Invoice Clearing PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆAccountÆFBL1N - Display/Change Line Items. Transaction Code: FBL1N By above transaction code the following screen display: Hear you can select specific vendor also

- 238 -


Version ECC 6.0


or click F8 button so it will display the following

In the above screen you can view the total invoice will be cleared and it shows only the outstanding amount in open item. Clear the balance amount in standard payment methods and view the report. Back to easy access screen

- 239 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 240 -


Version ECC 6.0 Parking Documents These documents are used to enter or store incomplete documents in SAP. These documents can be complete or checked and then post at a later date. Parked document information won’t be update with any of G/L till is post again. You can park data relating to customers, vendors, G/L accounts, and asset accounts. There is an additional fast entry function for G/L accounts. For assets, you can only enter acquisitions. Furthermore, you can park tax information and special sales, but you cannot park special sales for bills of exchange or down payments. SAP provides two transactions for document parking: the standard transaction and the single screen transaction (Enjoy). You can also check the document for completeness. For example, the system checks whether the document balance is zero and whether entries have been made in all required entry fields (such as posting key and account number). The authorization checks performed for document parking are basically the same as those performed for standard document entry and processing. The assignment of authorizations enables the system to differentiate between users who can only park documents and those who can park and post documents. No tolerance checks are performed. The system checks for erroneous entries. For example, you cannot enter an undefined business area. You can use account assignment models when parking documents, but not reference documents.

PATH: AccountingÆFinancial Accounting ÆGeneral Ledger ÆPostingÆF-02 - General Posting Transaction Code: F-02 By above transaction code it will display the following screen, In the following transaction we are trying post “Machinery Maintains exp”

In the above screen give all information as I shown. Posting key is 40 (G/L Debit) and account is Machine maintains exp G/L. Now pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 241 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen I has provided debit amount as “125000/-” and cost center but I don’t have credit information now so I am parking this entry in the middle as below: Now go to menu bar “Document + Park” it will display the following screen:

Above document has been parked with Document number 100010. Posting Parked Document PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General LedgerÆ DocumentÆ Parked DocumentsÆ FBV0 Post/Delete Transaction Code: FBV0 By above transaction code it will display the following screen,

- 242 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter Company Code, Parked Document Number, Fiscal Year and pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen it display the debit item as I parked with that information now I am giving credit information like document header text, posting key, account. Provide information to above screen and pres enter button it will display the following screen:

- 243 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen give “ * ” to a mount Coolum and pres enter button Go to menu bar “Document + Post” it will display the following screen with information as below:

In the above screen it shows the information saying parked document was posted. Now view report the database and G/L’s are updated. Sample Document Sample document is a template for original accounting document. Sample documents as reference document entered specifically for posting with sample documents. A sample document does not update G/L’s These documents hold separate number range that is “X2” this is assigned to number range under your company code. During document entry, you can have data from another document defaulted. The items from this reference document can be: •

Transferred without changes

•

Used for reverse postings

•

Changed

•

Omitted

•

Enhanced

In contrast to an accounting document, sample documents do not update transaction figures. They serve merely as data sources for an accounting document. Their advantage is that you can change or enhance them. You therefore use a sample document rather than an accounting document if you need a reference document for which you want to define the layout yourself. You use a sample document as a reference document in which assignment to more than one cost center is defined. If you want to assign to other cost centers, you can change the values in the sample document. If you use an accounting document as a reference document, you cannot make these changes because you also have to change the account assignments relevant for accounting.

- 244 -


Version ECC 6.0 You enter sample documents with a special function to ensure that these documents cannot be accidentally posted as accounting documents. If you store a sample document, the system automatically assigns a number to this special document. To do this, the system uses the number interval X2. This number range may only be used by the system. You cannot assign it to any document type. You have to set up this number range in all the company codes where sample documents are used. You have to use key X2 for this number range. Define Number Range for Sample Document PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆDocument Number RangesÆDocuments in Entry ViewÆDefine Document Number Ranges for Entry View. Transaction Code: FBN1

In the above screen enter your company code and click on “change intervals” button. It will display the following screen. In the displayed screen click on

it will display following window:

In the above window enter “X2”, year, From Number, and To number interval and click on enter button. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 245 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of Sample Document PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆPostingÆReference DocumentsÆF-01 - Sample Document Transaction Code: F-01 In this example I am creating sample document for G/L entry: Marketing Expenses G/L a/c Dr 150000/To SBI Cheque issue G/L 150000/By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter: Document Date, Posting Dates, Document Type, Company Code, Currency, PstKy(Posting Key as Debit G/L 40), and Account (Marketing Expenses G/L number) After entering above all information pres enter it will display the following screen:

- 246 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter: Amount(Amount for debit line item), text, PstKy(Credit posting key as 50), Account(Credit G/L SBI cheque issue number) After providing all above information pres enter button so it will display the following screen

In the above screen enter “*” to amount, “+” to text fields and pres enter so it will copy the information from previous screen.

- 247 -


Version ECC 6.0 Not go to menu bar “Document + post”. It will post it entry

After post it will issue an message with Sample Document number as above. Back to easy access screen.

To view or change Sample Document PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆDocumentÆReference DocumentsÆSample DocumentÆFBM2 – Change By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter your Sample document number which you want to post now to “Document Number ” field and enter information to “Company code”, “Fiscal Year” Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 248 -


Version ECC 6.0 In above screen either click on either of the line items and make changes if need and save the document. Posting Sample Document PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General LedgerÆ PostingÆ F-02 - General Posting By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen just click on “Post with reference” button it will display the following screen:

- 249 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen enter your Sample document number which you want to post now to “Document Number ” field and enter information to “Company code”, “Fiscal Year” Pres enter button two times so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen go to menu bar “Documents + Post” it will post the entry and display the following information message.

. The above message shows document posted number. (NOTE: like above any number of time you can post the same document.) Delete Sample Document PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General Ledger Æ Document Æ Reference Documents Æ Sample DocumentÆ F.57 – Delete Transaction Code: F.57 By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 250 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter your Company code, Document Number (Sample Document Number of which you want to delete), Fiscal year, Reference docyment type. Deflat the check box “Test Run” Now click on execute button so it will display the following window:

In the above window click on “Yes” button.

At final it will display the above information window about deleted documents details.

- 251 -


Version ECC 6.0 Recurring Entries Definition Periodically recurring entries posted by the recurring entries program based on recurring entry documents. This process is comparable to the standing order you give to your bank to deduct your rent, premium payments, or loan repayments. Recurring entries are business transactions that are repeated regularly, such as rent or insurance. The following data never changes in recurring entries: •

Posting key

•

Account

•

Amounts

You enter this recurring data in a recurring entry original document. This document does not update the transaction figures. The recurring entry program uses it as a basis for creating accounting documents. The system uses the recurring entry original document that you enter as a reference. It is not an accounting document and therefore does not affect the account balance. In the recurring entry document, you define when a posting is to be created with this document. You have two options for scheduling. Postings can be made periodically or on a specific date: •

For periodic postings, specify the first and last day of execution, as well as the interval in months.

•

If you want to specify certain dates, enter a run schedule in the recurring entry original document.

Recurring Document has separate number range that is “X1” to this number range we need to assign number interval to you company code.

Define Number Range for Sample Document PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆDocument Number RangesÆDocuments in Entry ViewÆDefine Document Number Ranges for Entry View. Transaction Code: FBN1

- 252 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter your company code and click on “change intervals” button. It will display the following screen. In the displayed screen click on

it will display following window:

In the above screen we gave “X1” as number range and interval for present fiscal year. Save the activity and back to easy access screen. Creation of Recurring Document PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General LedgerÆ PostingÆ Reference DocumentsÆ FBD1 Recurring Document Transaction code: FBD1 By the above transaction it will display the following screen: In this example I am posting following entry: Office rent a/c Dr 5000/Salary a/c Dr 6000/Land Lease a/c Dr 7000/Audit Fee a/c Dr 8000/To SBI cheque issue a/c

26000/-

- 253 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter values: Company code First run on (From which date the run schedule start) Last run on (On which date the run schedule ends) Interval in months Run date (On which date the entry has to be run) Pstky (Debit posting key) Account (Debit G/L Account number) Enter all above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 254 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost Centers are created) Another debit posting key and another G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 255 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost Centers are created) Another debit posting key and another G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost Centers are created) Another debit posting key and another G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 256 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen I entered amount for previous debit item, cost center (if CO is active and Cost Centers are created) Credit posting key and Credit G/L a/c number for next line item and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 257 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen put “*” symbol to amount field and “+” symbol to Text field and pres enter button. Now go to menu bar “Document + post” it will display the following message.

In the above message it shows the Recurring document number Back to easy access screen. Creation of Run Schedule PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Recurring EntriesÆ Define Run Schedules Transaction Code: OBC1 Database table: T054, T054T By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

- 258 -


Version ECC 6.0 In above screen enter new Run Schedule name and description. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Enter Run Dates PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ DocumentÆ Recurring EntriesÆ Enter Run Dates Transaction Code: OBC2 Database table: T054A By above transaction it will display the following window:

In above window enter Run schedule and pres enter it will display the following screen in it click on

In the above screen enter the schedule dates to which you want to run the recurring document. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. View Recurring Document PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆPeriodic ProcessingÆRecurring EntriesÆF.15 – Lists Transaction Code: F.15

- 259 -


Version ECC 6.0 By above transaction it will display the following screen:

Fill the above parameters and click on executive button so it will display the following screen:

Back to easy access screen.

Execute Recurring Document PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆPeriodic ProcessingÆRecurring EntriesÆ F.14 Execute Transaction Code: F.14 By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 260 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter the parameters like: Company Code Document Number Fiscal Year Settlement period Batch Input Session Name Enter the above parameter and click on Executive button so it will display the following message.

The above message says the Batch input Session was created with name we gave in above screen

To executive the sessions go to menu bar “Services + Batch Input + Session” it display the following screen:

- 261 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen we can view your session with your session name, so select that and click on “Process” button it will display the following window:

In above window select “Display errors only” radio button and click “Process” button. It thee is o any error s it will executive session and display the following information

In the above window just click on “Exit batch input” button. Check you G/L report with Transaction Code: FBL3N

- 262 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 263 -


Version ECC 6.0 Maintain Terms of Payment (Discount with Customer) PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆBusiness TransactionsÆOutgoing Invoices/Credit MemosÆMaintain Terms of Payment Transaction Code: OBB8 Database Table: T052, T052U, TVZB, TVZBT By above transaction code it will display the following screen, click on

:

In the above screen enter “Payt Terms” code to payment term “Sales text” description to payment term “Account type” either Customer or Vendor flag the check box or booth “Default baseline date” either Document date, Posting date, Entry date “Payment terms” Discount percentages and No of days. (NOTE: The above payment term we are doing for customer if we need to create payment tern to vendor under Account type select Vendor check box and all other process is same) In the above screen under “Payment Terms” that means if the customer is paying money in first 12 days he will get 12% of discount, if he pay from 12 days to 20 days from base line date he will get 8% of discount after that he wont get any discount. Save the activity and back to easy access screen.

- 264 -


Version ECC 6.0 Assign the Payment term to Customer Master PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆAccounts ReceivableÆMaster RecordsÆMaintain CentrallyÆXD02 Change Transaction code: XD02

In the above screen enter your company code and customer code and pres enter button so it will enter in to customer master data. , it will display the following screen:

Now in the customer master click on

In the above screen under “Payment Transactions” Tab to “Terms of Payment” field enter you payment terms code and save the activity. Back to easy access screen.

Assign “Discount Allowed” G/L account to Transaction Key Transaction code: OBXI NOTE: Transaction key is “SKT” By this transaction code it will display the following box:

- 265 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above box enter your chart of account and click on enter button, it display the following screen:

In the above screen just click on save button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter your “Discount Allowed” G/L account number. Save the activity and back to easy access screen.

Posting Customer Invoice PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆ Accounts ReceivableÆDocument EntryÆF-22 - Invoice – General Transaction Code: F-22 In the following screen:

- 266 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter required information and pres enter so it will display the following screen as below:

In the above screen we enter invoice amount, posting key, Credit G/L account, but the payment terms will appear automatically because we assign terms of payment code to customer and the same customer we taken in the first screen above to raise the invoice. Now pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 267 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen we enter “*” to Amount field and “+” to text field, button and assign Profit center information and pres enter button. Click on Then go to Menu Bar “Document + Simulate” The following screen appears:

No to post the entry either click on save button or , go to Man bar “Document + post” your entry will be posted. Clearing Customer Invoice NOTE: Clearing customer invoice with in 12 days with an 12% of discount

- 268 -


Version ECC 6.0 PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts ReceivableÆDocument EntryÆF-28 - Incoming Payments Transaction Code: F-28 By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

Give the invoice amount after the discount

In the above screen maintain all parameters as I shown. In amount Coolum give after discount amount (In the above example100000*12%/100 = 88000) Now pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 269 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen deselect all other line items except one which you clearing now. Go to menu bar “Document + Simulate”. It will display the following screen:

. In the above screen you can view the entry to clearing customer open item with discount. Now go to menu bar “Document + Post”, it will post the entry as issue the following message.

Back to easy access screen. Now view the reports: FBL5N: Customer Report FBL3N: G/L Report.

- 270 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 271 -


Version ECC 6.0 TAX ON SALES AND PURCHASES Tax is calculated from expenses or revenues, which is a base amount. A base amount may include cash discount or not. If it includes it is a net base amount otherwise it is gross amount. It varies from country to country. To determine the base amount, whether to include cash discount or not , set the indicator in basic settings of taxes on sales/purchases. You can use the SAP System to manage various types of tax according to the legal requirements of a country or a region. The Financial Accounting components Accounts Receivable (FI-AR), Accounts Payable (FI/AP), and General Ledger provides the following comprehensive tax functions: Tax calculation: The system calculates tax amounts with or without cash discount based on the tax base amount. Tax posting: The system posts the tax amounts to defined tax accounts. Adjustments: The system corrects tax amounts, in the case of cash discount or other deductions, for example. Tax reporting: You can use the system to create tax returns. Tax on Sales and Purchases Taxes on sales and purchases are levied on every sales transaction in accordance with the principles of VAT. This applies to input and output tax, for example. Input tax is calculated using the net invoice amount and is charged Output tax is calculated using the net price of products and is charged to the customer.

by

the

vendor.

Companies can offset input tax against output tax, paying the balance to the tax authorities. Tax authorities can set a nondeductible portion for input tax which cannot then be claimed from the tax authorities. The Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger application components support the calculation and posting of tax as follows: •

The tax amount can be determined upon request

•

The tax amount is checked by the system at document level

•

The tax amount is posted to the tax accounts automatically

•

A tax adjustment can be performed automatically, if required, for cash discount postings and other deductions

These transactions are controlled using Customizing, whereby the following specifications need to be made: • •

To determine the tax amount, the system calculates a base amount, the composition of which varies from country to country. You determine whether the base amount for tax calculation is to include the specified cash discount amount. This information must be defined for each company code. To enter and determine taxes automatically, a tax code is required, which will include the tax rate prescribed by law.

- 272 -


Version ECC 6.0

•

•

The tax amount is generally posted automatically. For posting, specify the tax accounts to which the individual taxes are to be posted. In a G/L account master record, you can specify whether the account is a tax account, and if so, which tax type (input tax or output tax) can be posted to the account. For all other G/L accounts, you can use the master record to specify a tax rate and a tax type, or specify that it is not tax-relevant.

NOTE: in India the taxes or INPUT TAX (Tax on purchases), OUTPUT TAX (Tax on sales) INPUT TAX • • • •

Excise Duty Paid CESS Paid VAT Paid If the tax is with in the State VAT will be calculated, If the tax is out of CST Paid

state CST will be calculated

OUTPUT TAX • • • •

Excise Duty Payable CESS Payable If the tax is with in the State VAT will be calculated, if the tax is VAT Payable CST Payable out of state CST will be calculated

Step 1: Define Condition type You determine the calculation type for a condition type in Customizing. This determines how the system calculates prices, taxes, discounts and surcharges for a condition. When setting up condition records, you can enter a different calculation type than the one in Customizing. At present all available calculation types are permitted. The field ‘Calculation type’ can however not be accessed if this field is left empty. After the data release has been printed, if the field has not been completed manually, the proposal is automatically taken from Customizing. After this it is no longer possible to make manual changes. If you use different calculation types for what are otherwise the same conditions (for example, percentage, as a fixed amount or quantity-dependent), you do not have to define different condition types in Customizing. You can set a different calculation type when maintaining the individual condition records. Condition Types in the Standard Version of the SAP System The standard system includes, among many others, the following predefined condition types: Condition type

Description

PR00

Price

K004

Material discount

K005

Customer-specific material discount

K007

Customer discount

K020

Price group discount

KF00

Freight surcharge (by item)

- 273 -


Version ECC 6.0 UTX1

State tax

UTX2

County tax

UTX3

City tax

Condition type Structure: What calculation the system carries out in that step depends on the following control indicators: • • • •

Access sequences Condition class Calculation type Condition category

Access Sequences: An access sequence is a search strategy that the system uses to find valid data for a particular condition type. It determines the sequence in which the system searches for data. The access sequence consists of one or more accesses. The sequence of the accesses establishes which condition records have priority over others. The accesses tell the system where to look first, second, and so on, until it finds a valid condition record. You specify an access sequence for each condition type for which you create condition records. The access sequence enables the system to access the data records in a particular sequence until it finds a valid price or value Condition class: This is Preliminary structure of condition types. It determines whether condition type is Discount or surcharge, Taxes, Prices Etc. Calculation type: Determines how the system calculates prices, discounts, or surcharges in a condition. For example, the system can calculate a price as a fixed amount or as a percentage based on quantity, volume, or weight. The calculation type can be set when generating new condition records. If this does not happen, the calculation type maintained here is valid for the condition record. Condition category: A classification of conditions according to pre-defined categories (for example, all conditions that relate to freight costs). PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Tax on Sales/PurchasesÆ Basic SettingsÆ Check Calculation Procedure. Transaction Code: OBYZ

Database Table: T685, T685A, T685T By the above transaction code it display following screen:

- 274 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen double click on “Define condition types” so it will display another screen so click on it will display he following screen:

In the above screen maintain parameters like Condition type, Condition class, Calculation type, Condition Category and click on

(Next) button.

It will display the following new screen:

- 275 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, Calculation type, Condition Category and click on

(Next) button.


- 276 -


Version ECC 6.0


(Next) button.


- 277 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, Calculation type, Condition Category and click on

(Next) button.


In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, (Next) button. Calculation type, Condition Category and click on It will display the following new screen:

- 278 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, (Next) button. Calculation type, Condition Category and click on It will display the following new screen:

- 279 -


Version ECC 6.0 the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, Calculation (Next) button. type, Condition Category and click on It will display the following new screen:

The above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, Calculation. Type, Condition Category and click on It will display the following new screen:

(Next) button.

- 280 -


Version ECC 6.0

the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, Calculation (Save) button to save the activity. type, Condition Category and click on Back to SPRO screen.

- 281 -


Version ECC 6.0 Step 2: Check and Change Settings for Tax Processing In this activity you make the necessary specifications for posting taxes. In doing this you specify under a process key the following indicators: Tax type: Output tax, input tax, additional taxes, or "not tax-relevant" can be specified as the tax type. Non deductibility: This is of tax amounts for this, tax amounts are marked as not deductible. Posting indicator: Here you specify whether the tax amount is posted separately or distributed to expense or revenue items. Tax not relevant to cash discount (Not discount relevant): This indicator is set only for Canada. If you select it, the system does not take into account the corresponding tax amount when determining the tax base.

PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Tax on Sales/PurchasesÆ Basic SettingsÆ Check and Change Settings for Tax Processing Transaction Code: OBCN Database Table: T007B, T687, T687T By the above transaction code it displays following screen, click on screen:

it will display he following

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on button. It will display the following new screen:

- 282 -

(Next)


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on button.

(Next)



- 283 -

(Next)


Version ECC 6.0


(Next)



(Next)



- 284 -

(Next)


Version ECC 6.0


(Next)


In the above screen maintain Process, Description, Tax Type, Posting Indicator and click on button, so it save the activity.

(Save)

Back to SPRO screen.

Step 3: Define Procedure A calculation procedure is defined for each country, each containing the specifications required to calculate and post tax on sales/purchases. Each calculation procedure contains several tax types, which are called condition types in the procedure. The system defaults condition types when you define a tax code. The condition type (such as input or output tax) specifies the base amount on which the tax is calculated and the account key that is used to post the tax. The specifications necessary for calculating and posting tax have been defined for the condition type and account key. The calculation procedure determines the amount on which the individual condition types are calculated. This can be the base amount (total of expense and revenue items) or a subtotal. Incoming acquisition tax, for example, is not calculated based on the expense or revenue items, but on the tax amount for outgoing acquisition tax. The column Fr.level determines the amount on which tax is calculated.

- 285 -


Version ECC 6.0 PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Tax on Sales/PurchasesÆ Basic SettingsÆ Check Calculation Procedure Transaction Code: OBYZ Database Table: T683, T683S, T683T, T683U, T685, T685A, T685T By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

in the above screen double click on “Define Procedures” so it will display an screen click on button so it display the following screen.

In the above screen give procedure name and description and select the same entry and click on “Control Data” under Dialog Structure. So it will display the following screen, click on

:

- 286 -


Version ECC 6.0

Step: Number that determines the sequence of the conditions within a procedure. CTyp(Condition Type) : Condition types which we already created in the above steps those indicate each activity or tax in above case. Fro, To (From , To): This indicates which tax should calculate on which base amount. For example take: 20 “1102Excise duty paid”, for this tax the fields Fro, To fields I had given as 10, 10 That means “1102Excise duty paid” should calculate on “1102 Base Amount”. Take 30 “1102Cess paid”, for this tax the fields Fro, To fields i had given as 10, 20 That means “1102Cess paid”, should calculate on “1102 Base Amount + 1102Excise duty paid” AccKey: in this field assign Account Keys to respective Condition types as we created in above steps. After we maintain above parameters save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Step 4: Assign Country to Calculation Procedure PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Tax on Sales/PurchasesÆ Basic SettingsÆ Assign Country to Calculation Procedure Transaction Code: OBBG

- 287 -


Version ECC 6.0 Database Table: T005 By the above transaction it will display the a screen on that click on display the following small box:

button so it will

In the above box give country “in” and click on enter button so it will show country “in” on the top to screen as below:

Use this F4 function to select your Procedure

In the above screen against “IN” assign your Calculation Procedure which we created in above step select it by using F4 function. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Step 5: Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases

Tax codes are used to: •

Check the tax on sales/purchases amount in the document

•

Calculate the amount of tax on sales/purchases automatically on request

•

Calculate the non-deductible input tax portion

•

Check if a tax account with tax type (input or output tax) can be posted to

- 288 -


Version ECC 6.0 •

Determine the tax account

You define a tax code by entering a two-digit code to represent a tax percentage rate. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Tax on Sales/PurchasesÆ CalculationÆ Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases Transaction Code: FTXP Input Tax codes By the above transaction it displays the following window:

In the above screen give your country “IN” and click enter button so it will display the following screen as below:

In the above screen enter Tax Code as you want and pres enter button. Note: Here I given “i0” for input tax

- 289 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen: Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description. We define a tax code by entering a two-digit code to represent a tax percentage rate.

Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax.You use the tax type to specify whether the tax is an input tax or output tax. The system uses the tax type to check that you are posting to an account with an allowed code. An error message is output if necessary. This happens, for example, if you enter a tax code for input tax when posting to a customer account for which only output tax codes are allowed. For every individual tax type, there are country-specific definitions for whether the tax amount fields and the fields for the percentage specifications are ready for input. Tax Type “V”: Input Tax Tax Type “A”: Output Tax In above screen I had given “V” so it is Input Tax indicator. CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is not correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error message. The check indicator determines that if the tax amount is not correct, the error must be corrected. This means that you can prevent users from posting incorrect amounts of output tax. If you do not set a check indicator, the system issues a warning in the case of a different tax amount; a correction does not have to be made. This is necessary for input tax postings, since the tax amount on the incoming invoice is the amount users must enter when posting the invoice. Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 290 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen I assigned all zeros to all input taxes so it is 0% tax indicator. Save the activity so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen we creating another input tax indicator with “I1”. In the above screen against Tax code field give “I1” and pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 291 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen: Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description. Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax V: Input Tax A: Output Tax In above screen I had given “V” so it is Input Tax indicator. CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is not correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error message. Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 292 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, Vat. That says if client is doing purchases with the state this tax indicator is used (For India). Save the activity. So it displays the following screen:

In the above screen we creating another input tax indicator with “I2”. In the above screen against Tax code field give “I2” and pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 293 -


Version ECC 6.0


- 294 -


Version ECC 6.0 In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, CST. That says if client is doing purchases out of the state this tax indicator is used (For India). Save the activity. So it displays the following screen: Output Tax Codes

In the above screen enter Tax Code as you want and pres enter button. Note: Here I given “O0” for Output tax

In the above screen: Tax Code: In this field Tax Code will copy automatically so give detail description. Tax Type: It indicates whether this Tax Code is Input tax or Output Tax V: Input Tax A: Output Tax In above screen I had given “A” so it is Output Tax indicator. CheckID: Indicator which determines that an error message should be issued if the tax amount is not correct. If the indicator is not set, a warning message appears in place of the error message. Enter the above parameters and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 295 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above case I had given 0% taxes to Excise duty, Cess, VAT, and CST. That says if client is doing sales out of the state or with in the state this tax indicator is used (For India) if tax is 0%. Save the activity. So it displays the following screen:


- 296 -


Version ECC 6.0


- 297 -


Version ECC 6.0 In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, VAT. That says if client is doing sales with in the state this tax indicator is used (For India). Save the activity. So it displays the following screen:



- 298 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above case I had given taxes to Excise duty, Cess, CST. That says if client is doing sales out of the state this tax indicator is used (For India). Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Step 6: Create relevant G/L Accounts PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General LedgerÆ Master RecordsÆ G/L AccountsÆ Individual ProcessingÆ FS00 – Centrally FIELD NAME

INPUT VALUE

INPUT VALUE

INPUT VALUE

INPUT VALUE

INPUT VALUE

INPUT VALUE

INPUT VALUE

INPUT VALUE

G/L ACCOUNT NO

220001

220002

220003

220004

120001

120002

120003

120004

INPUT VALUE

SAVE SAVE COMPANY CODE

1102

1102

1102

1102

1102

1102

1102

1102

ACCOUNT GROUP

ASSETS

ASSETS

ASSETS

ASSETS

LIABILITIES

LIABILITIES

LIABILITIES

LIABILITI ES

P&L STATEMENT ACCT/BALANCE SHEET ACCT

Balance sheet account








SAVE

SHORT TEXT / LONG TEXT

EXCISE DUTY PAID

CESS PAID

VAT PAID

CST PAID

EXCISE DUTY PAYABLE

CESS PAYABLE

VAT PAYABLE

CST PAYABLE

SAVE

- 299 -

SAVE


Version ECC 6.0 ACCOUNT CURRENCY

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

INR

ONLY BALANCE IN LOCAL CURRENCY

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

TAX CATEGORY

-

-

-

-

+

+

+

+

POSTING WITHOUT TAX ALLOWED

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

OPEN ITEM MANAGEMENT

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SAVE

LINEITEM DISPLAY

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

SAVE

SORT KEY

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

001

SAVE

FIELD STATUS GROUP

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

G001

SAVE

(“X” indicate to flag the check box) •

Open Purchases G/L Account and go to “Control Data” tab in the FS00 screen. In that tab assign “>” symbol to “Tax Category” field and flat the “Posting Without Tax Allowed”

•

Open Sales G/L Account and go to “Control Data” tab in the FS00 screen. In that tab assign “<” symbol to “Tax Category” field and flat the “Posting Without Tax Allowed”

- 300 -

SAVE

SAVE

SAVE

SAVE


Version ECC 6.0 Step 7: Define Tax Codes for Sales and Purchases PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Tax on Sales/PurchasesÆ PostingÆ Define Tax Accounts Transaction Code: OB40 By the above transaction it displays the following window:

These are the account keys we created. Double click on this one by one to assign G/L

In the above screen you can view your Tax Account Keys. For each account key you need to assign G/L accounts as you created in Transaction Code FS00. To assign G/L accounts:

Now double click on Transaction “001” so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen give your chart of account and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 301 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen just click on Save


In the above screen click on Posting Key button so it will display the following screen:

- 302 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen assign “40 – G/L Debit” Posting key to Debit field, assign “50 – G/L Credit” Posting key to Credit field and save the activity. Click on “Accounts” button so It displays the following screen:

This is Excise duty paid account key so assign that G/L account

Click on F4 function to assign relevant G/L account.

In above screen assign Excise duty Paid G/L account number and save the screen. Back to main screen. NOTE: As I shown above G/L Account assignment do all other assignment’s to all account key for input and output taxes.

Step 8: Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions In this activity you define an incoming and outgoing tax code for each company code, to be used for posting non-taxable transactions to tax-relevant accounts. Transactions posted like this are, for example; goods issue delivery, goods movement, goods receipt purchase order, goods receipt production order, order accounting. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Tax on Sales/PurchasesÆ PostingÆ Assign Tax Codes for Non-Taxable Transactions Transaction Code: OBCL Database Table: T001 By the above transaction it displays following screen: Click on

button so it will display the following small box:

In the above box enter your company cods, and click on enter button so your company code will display at the top of screen below:

- 303 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen against to your company code assign 0% Input Tax code and Output Tax Code. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Posting Customer Invoice with Output taxes PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts ReceivableÆDocument EntryÆF-22 - Invoice – General Transaction Code: F-22

In the above screen enter Document Date, Document Type, Company Code, Posting Date, Period, Currency/Rate, PstKy(Posting Key – Customer Debit), Account(Customer Number). After entering above all parameters pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 304 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter Amount, flag check box Calculate tax, text, PstKy(G/L Credit Posting key), Account(G/L Credit account number). After entering above parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter “ * ” symbol to Amount field, “ + ” symbol to Text symbol, give Output Tax code to Tax Code field and click on


- 305 -


Version ECC 6.0 In this case tax is output tax so I had given “O1” and sales is with in state so CST tax wont calculate. If tax is out of state take tax Code as “O2” then CST will calculate and VAT wont calculate.

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if don’t create them you can leave blank those fields

In the above screen enter Business area, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area and click on enter button. Now go to Manu bar and “Document + simulate”

- 306 -


Version ECC 6.0

Sales are with in state so CST tax won’t calculate VAT will calculate. If tax is out of state take tax Code as “O2” then CST will calculate and VAT won’t calculate. Go to Manu bar “Document + Post”, so it will post the entry and gives the following information message.

Back to easy access screen. Report in G/L PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General Ledger Æ AccountÆ FBL3N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction Code: FBL3N By the above transaction code it display selection screen on this click on multiple selection button will displays following screen:

- 307 -

so it


Version ECC 6.0

Select these G/L accounts

This is copy button click on this

Now click on copy button

, so it will take you to precious screen as below:

Now click on executive button so it displays the following screen:

- 308 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 309 -


Version ECC 6.0 Posting Vendor Invoice with Input Tax PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ Accounts PayableÆ Document EntryÆ F-43 - Invoice – General Transaction code: F-43 By the above transaction code it display the following screen:

In the above screen enter Document Date, Document Type, Company Code, Posting Date, Period, Currency/Rate, PstKy(Posting Key –Vendor Credit), Account(Vendor Number). After entering above all parameters pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 310 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen enter Amount, flag check box Calculate tax, text, PstKy(G/L Credit Posting key), Account(G/L Debit account number). After entering above parameters pres on enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter “ * ” symbol to Amount field, “ + ” symbol to Text symbol, give Output Tax code to Tax Code field and click on


In this case tax is Input tax so I had given “I1” and Purchases is with in state so CST tax won’t calculate. If tax is out of state take tax Code as “I2” then CST will calculate and VAT won’t calculate.

- 311 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter Business area, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area and click on enter button. Now go to Manu bar and “Document + simulate”

In this case tax is Input tax so I had given “I1” and Purchases is with in state so CST tax won’t calculate. If tax is out of state take tax Code as “I2” then CST will calculate and VAT won’t calculate.

Go to Manu bar “Document + Post”, so it will post the entry and gives the following information message.

- 312 -


Version ECC 6.0 Back to easy access screen. Report in G/L PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ General Ledger Æ AccountÆ FBL3N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction Code: FBL3N By the above transaction code it display selection screen on this click on multiple selection button will displays following screen:

Select required G/L accounts Select this copy button to executive

Now click on copy button

, so it will take you to precious screen as below:

- 313 -

so it


Version ECC 6.0

Now click on executive button to get report.

Back to easy access screen.

- 314 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 315 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 316 -


Version ECC 6.0 CASH JOURNAL A double-entry compact journal managed in account form that records the postings for cash transactions. By setting the cash balance at the beginning of the day, the cash journal shows the cash balance at any time by adding the cash receipts and deducting the cash expenses. The cash journal also serves as a basis for entries in the general ledger and thereby represents the "Cash" G/L account. The cash journal is a sub ledger of Bank Accounting. It is used to manage a company's cash transactions. The system automatically calculates and displays the opening and closing balances, and the receipts and payments totals. You can run several cash journals for each company code. You can also carry out postings to G/L accounts, as well as vendor and customer accounts. The cash journal is a single-screen transaction. This means that you can enter, display, and change cash journal documents on one screen. Entering, saving, and posting cash journal entries You can save cash journal entries locally in the cash journal. The system also calculates the balances. The cash journal entries saved are then posted to the general ledger. For a cash journal document, you can carry out CO account assignments, and have taxes, including withholding taxes, calculated by the system with reference to business transactions, taking account of tax jurisdiction codes, for example. Displaying follow-on documents You can also display the follow-on documents arising for the cash journal entries posted. Defining cash journal business transactions As well as defining cash journal business transactions in Customizing, you can also, if necessary, define a new business transaction while you are making entries in the cash journal. Printing the cash journal You can print all cash journal entries posted in the time period displayed. You select the print form in Customizing. Printing receipts You can print the cash journal entries saved. You select the print form in Customizing. Deleting cash journal entries saved If you have the appropriate authorization, you can delete cash journal entries that have been saved. Displaying all cash journal documents that have been deleted You can display all the cash journal documents that have been deleted within a specific time period. Changing the cash journal You can change the cash journal and the company code while you are processing entries.

- 317 -


Version ECC 6.0

Create G/L Account for Cash Journal PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCash JournalÆCreate G/L Account for Cash Journal Transaction Code: FS00 or FS01 FIELDS G/L Account Company code Account Group P&L Statement acct / Balance sheet Account Short text / G/L acct Long Text Only Balance in Local Crcy Line item display Sort Key Field statue group Post automatically only

ENTRIES G/L account number (From Assets number range) 1102 (Your Company Code) Assets Balance Sheet Account Cash Journal – 1 X (Flag the check box) X (Flag the check box) 001 G001 X (Flag the check box)

Save the G/L account and back to SPRO screen. Amount Limit You use these functions to define limit values for the FI cash journal; where these limits are reached and exceeded, the user is prompted (in an information dialog box) to run certain activities. The check is always performed in the first local currency of the company code. In the countries of the European Union, these functions are used to draw attention to the legal requirement for identifying the payer. You do not have to enter a company code. The entry is then valid for all company codes within a client that use the currency specified as the first local currency. PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCash JournalÆ Amount Limit Database Table: TCJ_MAX_AMOUNT By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

:

In the above screen maintain parameters like your company code, currency, Valid from (Date) and Amount.

- 318 -


Version ECC 6.0 After maintain save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 319 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Number Range Intervals for Cash Journal Documents PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCash JournalÆ Define Number Range Intervals for Cash Journal Documents By above transaction it will display the following screen

so it will display another screen.

In above screen enter you company code and click on In display screen click on

so it will display the following windiw:

In above window enter number range as “01” and for that give any number interval as I shown above. Click on enter button and save the screen. Back to SPRO screen. Set Up Cash Journal To set up a new cash journal for a company code, enter the appropriate data for the following fields: Company code: Company code in which you want to run the cash journal Number: Random number for cash journal identification; you can run several cash journals in each company code G/L account: G/L account to which you want to post the cash journal business transactions, usually the petty cash account.

- 320 -


Version ECC 6.0 Currency: Currency in which you want to run the cash journal. You are free to choose the cash journal currency. If you want to run a cash journal whose currency does not correspond to that of the company code, you have to consider the following details in the corresponding cash journal G/L account master data: - The indicator Balances in local currency only should not be set - The account currency must correspond to the company code currency You can run several cash journals with different currencies in one cash journal G/L account. Several cash journals with the same currency in one G/L account is however not possible. If you want to run several cash journals in the same currency in one company code, you have to select different cash journal G/L accounts. Cash Journal Closed: Indicator that a cash journal is closed Document types for: • • • • •

G/L account postings Outgoing payments to vendors Incoming payments from vendors Incoming payments from customers Outgoing payments to customers

Name: Automatic language-dependent cash journal identification name, for example, Cash journal 1 SAP AG Authorization group: Enables access protection for specific objects NOTE: If you use extended withholding tax in your company code, you have to make the corresponding settings for posting payments. PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCash JournalÆ Set Up Cash Journal Database Table: TCJ_CJ_NAMES, TCJ_C_JOURNALS By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

- 321 -

:


Version ECC 6.0 Define Business Transaction •

Company code: The company code in which the business transactions should be created

•

Business transaction number: Random number that uniquely identifies the business transaction (these numbers are automatically assigned by the system)

•

Business transaction type: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

•

E (Expense) R (Revenue) B (Cash transfer cash journal to bank) C (Cash transfer bank to cash journal) D (Customers-incoming/outgoing payment) K (Vendors-outgoing/incoming payment)

G/L account: Expense or revenue account for the offsetting postings of G/L account postings, for example 400000 or 800000; Caution: You must not make entries in the fields for business transaction types D and K.

•

Tax code: Determines the business transaction control Caution: You may only make entries in this field for business transaction types E and R.

•

Cash journal business transaction: Random, automatic language-dependent indicator for the business transaction, for example, SAP Shop or Taxi.

•

Business transaction block: Indicator that a business transaction is blocked for additional postings.

•

Account Modifiable during Document Entry: Indicator that you can change the G/L account during document entry. If you set the indicator, you can change the G/L account assigned to the business transaction during document entry. The account defined is therefore a default value. If no account is defined, you have to enter an account during document entry. You can set the indicator for business transactions of the category E, R, C, and B.

•

Tax Code Modifiable during Document Entry: Indicator that you can change the tax code during document entry. If you set the indicator, you can change the tax code assigned to the business transaction during document entry. The tax code defined is therefore a default value. If no tax code is defined, you have to enter one during document entry provided this is required for the account. You can set the indicator for business transactions of the category E and R.

PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCash JournalÆ Create, Change, Delete Business Transactions Database Table: TCJ_TRANSACTIONS, TCJ_TRANS_NAMES By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

- 322 -

:


Version ECC 6.0

Set Up Print Parameters for Cash Journal In order to print the cash journal and the cash journal receipts, you have to set up the corresponding print program parameters per company code. •

Enter the appropriate company code.

•

Specify the following print program parameters per company code: •

For the cash journal:

- Print program usually RFCASH00 - Report variant For example, with entries FI_CASH_BB (Opening balance text), FI_CASH_EB (Closing balance text), FI_CASH_CF (C/F text), FI_CASH_SI (Signature text) •

For the cash journal receipts:

- Correspondence type For example - SAPC1 Accounting document: If you set the indicator Accounting documents, the receipts are printed based on the FI documents. If you do not set the indicator, you can print all the documents saved in the cash journal based on the cash journal documents. Not setting theindicator is therefore recommended. PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCash JournalÆ Set Up Print Parameters for Cash Journal Database Table: TCJ_PRINT

- 323 -


Version ECC 6.0 By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

In the above screen enter above parameters. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 324 -

:


Version ECC 6.0

- 325 -


Version ECC 6.0 Withholding Tax Tax that is charged at the beginning of the payment flow in some countries. Usually, the party that is subject to tax does not pay the withholding tax over to the tax authorities himself. When a customer that is authorized to deduct withholding tax pays invoices from a vendor subject to withholding tax, the customer reduces the payment amount by the withholding tax proportion. The customer then pays the tax withheld directly to the appropriate tax authorities (see diagram). Withholding Tax

An exception to this rule is self-withholding. The vendor subject to tax then has the right to pay the tax to the authorities himself. Use To calculate, pay, and report the withholding tax, the SAP System provides two functions: ·

Classic Withholding Tax (all Releases)

·

Extended Withholding Tax (from Release 4.0)

For each company code, you can decide whether you want to use classic or extended withholding tax. Since the extended withholding tax option includes all the functions of classic withholding tax, SAP recommends the use of extended withholding tax (see below: Table of Classic and Extended Withholding Tax Functions). If you have previously used classic withholding tax, and now wish to change over to extended withholding tax, you must first convert the withholding tax data in all the company codes affected.

- 326 -


Version ECC 6.0 Classic and Extended Withholding Tax Functions Individual Functions Withholding tax on outgoing payment Withholding tax on incoming payment Withholding tax posting at time of payment Withholding tax posting at time of invoice Withholding tax posting on partial payment Number of withholding taxes for each document item Withholding tax base: Net amount Modified net amount Gross amount Tax amount Modified tax amount Rounding rule Cash discount considered Accumulation Minimum/maximum amounts and exemption limits Number assignment on document posting (certificate numbering) Calculation formulas

Classic Withholding Tax X X

Max. 1 X X

X

Extended Withholding Tax X X X X X Several X X X X X X X X X X X

Country Version India comes ready configured with all the settings you need to track and remit withholding taxes under the following sections of the Income Tax Act, 1961: · Payments to contractors and subcontractors (Section 194 C) · Insurance commission (Section 194 D) · Rent (Section 194 I) · Fees for professional or technical services (Section 194 J) · Interest other than interest on securities (Section 194 A) (only supported in the Extended Withholding Tax solution) Country Version India offers you two solutions for handling withholding tax (also known as tax deducted at source or TDS). You can either use the Classic Withholding Tax solution or the Extended Withholding Tax solution. Taxes withheld under each section are treated differently with regard to the time limits for remitting tax to the authorities, providing the taxpayer with a withholding tax certificate, and filing an annual return. In addition, the formats for the withholding tax certificates and the returns also differ. The Income Tax Act requires you to calculate taxes as soon as you enter an invoice. However, if you make a down payment to a vendor before you have received an invoice from it, you withhold tax on the down payment. Then, once the invoice arrives, you clear the down payment against it. When you prepare your annual returns, the act also requires you to make provisions for taxes on services received but not yet invoiced. Country Version India complements the generic Classic Withholding Tax and Extended Withholding Tax solutions with additional functions that meet the needs of the Income Tax Act. These functions allow you to:

- 327 -


Version ECC 6.0 • • • • •

· · · · ·

Ensure that you remit taxes within the due date Track and report withholding tax surcharges separately Adjust withholding taxes when you clear a down payment against an invoice Prepare withholding tax certificates and annual returns Calculate withholding tax on provisions

Extended Withholding Tax With extended withholding tax, you can process withholding tax from both the vendor and customer view. In Accounts Payable, the vendor is the person subject to tax, and the company code is obligated to deduct withholding tax and pay this over to the tax authorities on the vendor’s behalf. In Accounts Receivable, the company code itself is subject to tax, and the customers that do business with this company code deduct withholding tax and pay this over to the tax authorities on the company code’s behalf. In both cases, the business partner of the person/entity subject to tax deducts the tax and pays it over to the tax authorities. Withholding tax is calculated and posted to the appropriate withholding tax accounts at different stages, depending on the legal requirements in each country. As a rule, withholding tax is posted at the same time that the payment is posted, in other words the outgoing payment (Accounts Payable) or incoming payment (Accounts Receivable), is reduced by the withholding tax amount. The key concept in extended withholding tax is the distinction between withholding tax type and withholding tax code. • • •

While withholding tax types represent basic calculation rules, Withholding tax code specific features of these rules - in particular the percentage rate You can define any number of withholding tax codes for a given withholding tax type.

If a particular transaction requires more than one kind of withholding tax, this is covered in the SAP System by defining more than one withholding tax type. When entering a line item, you can enter withholding tax data for each of these withholding tax types. The following special features also exist: •

•

In some countries, such as Argentina and Italy, other kinds of posting are required for certain business transactions. Instead of the payment amount being reduced by the withholding tax amount, the withholding tax is posted as an offsetting entry to an expense account You make the relevant settings in the withholding tax code. Where cleared items are reset, the clearing document is automatically reversed if it contains withholding tax data. For withholding tax types with accumulation, the accumulation base amount is adjusted if the payment document is reversed.

Using the Extended Withholding Tax solution, you can withhold and report tax under all sections of the Income Tax Act listed in Withholding Tax. Since a company may consist of more than one entity responsible for withholding taxes, each of which is identified by a separate TAN, you use a separate SAP organizational unit to represent each entity, the section code. Country Version India comes with sample customizing settings for all of the aforementioned sections of the Income Tax Act. The settings include: •

Withholding tax types

•

Withholding tax codes

- 328 -


Version ECC 6.0 •

Official withholding tax keys, which represent the different sections of the Income Tax Act

•

Recipient types, which represent the categorization of taxpayers into "companies" and "others," again, as per the Income Tax Act You must also customize your own section codes.

Day-to-Day Activities You are required to calculate taxes either when you enter an invoice or when you make any sort of payment, whichever comes first. Since a full payment is seldom made before the invoice arrives, that means in effect that you withhold taxes when you enter an invoice or a down payment. When you enter a vendor invoice or make a down payment that is liable to withholding tax, the system automatically creates line items for the appropriate taxes, including surcharges. Since different taxes need to be remitted on different dates, depending on the section of the Income Tax Act, the system also calculates and records each line item's due date. If you first make a down payment (and withhold tax on it) and then enter the vendor invoice later on, you have to clear the invoice against the down payment so that you do not withhold tax on the same item twice. As far as your receivables are concerned, you also enter withholding tax certificates sent to you by your customers, as proof of tax that they have withheld on payments to you. Periodic Processing At the end of each period, you make provisions for taxes on services received. The authorities in India require you to remit taxes following a specific procedure. First, you create a remittance challan with a list of the withholding tax items that you are remitting. You then send the challan to the authorities, along with the check. Once the check has been cashed, the bank sends you a bank challan to confirm the payment. You then enter the bank challan in the system. The system automatically tracks each withholding tax item's remittance challan and bank challan. When you have remitted the tax, you can print out withholding tax certificates for all taxes that you have withheld, using functions specific to Country Version India. Before you create your annual returns, you can also check for any customers that have not yet sent you a withholding tax certificate for tax that they have withheld from you. Again, with receivables, if you make interest payments to your customers, you must also withhold tax on them as appropriate. Journal entry for a Withholding Tax as below: Purchases/ rent/ job work on contract a/c DR***** To Vendor/ Contractor To TDS a/c To Surcharge a/c ***** To Education Cess on TDS a/c To Education Cess on surcharge a/c ***** To Higher Education Cess on TDS a/c To Higher Education Cess on Surcharge a/c *****

***** ***** ***** *****

- 329 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above entry in credit side we have withholding tax line items like: •

TDS a/c

•

Surcharge a/c

•

Education Cess on TDS a/c

•

Education Cess on surcharge a/c

•

Higher Education Cess on TDS a/c

•

Higher Education Cess on Surcharge a/c

All the above different taxes we have to create as Tax Type and Tax code in SAP, that configuration we do in the following steps.

- 330 -


Version ECC 6.0 Check Withholding Tax Countries PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Check Withholding Tax Countries It will display another screen click on

so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter your country and W/Tax City Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Define Withholding Tax Type In one business transaction, several kinds of withholding tax may have to be withheld. The SAP System uses withholding tax types to reflect this. Several withholding tax types can be defined in the system; one or more can be assigned in the vendor master record. The withholding tax type governs the way in which extended withholding tax is calculated and is defined at country level. As far as the time of posting for withholding tax amounts is concerned, there are two different categories of withholding tax types: •

Withholding tax type for posting at time of invoice

•

Withholding tax type for posting at time of payment

Withholding tax types classify different withholding taxes according to such features as: • • •

Point at which the tax is posted Method of calculating tax base amount Accumulation

Several withholding tax codes can be assigned to one withholding tax type. withholding tax types for calculating tax at invoice posting and another one for calculating tax at payment posting. All of the withholding tax types are customized so that certificate numbers are not assigned at this level. They are assigned by the programs that you use for printing the withholding tax certificates instead. When you have defined the withholding tax types, define the withholding tax codes and recipient types. When you enter a document that is liable to tax, the system automatically applies the tax type and tax code appropriate to that vendor or customer. Make the following entries:

- 331 -


Version ECC 6.0 •

General data

Define the name of the withholding tax type. •

Calculation

Define the details for calculating the withholding tax base amounts and the rounding rules for the withholding tax amount. You also determine whether the withholding tax amount is to be both calculated and posted or only calculated (the latter is the case in France, for example). •

Base amount

Field

Meaning

Net amount

The withholding tax base amount is the line item net amount.

Modified amount

net

The withholding tax base amount is equal to line item net amount plus a number of specific tax amounts. The processing keys for the tax amounts to be totaled have to be specified for this withholding tax type in a separate activity in Customizing.

Gross amount

The withholding tax base amount equals the line item gross amount.

Tax amount

The withholding tax base amount equals the tax amount of the line item.

Modified amount

tax

The withholding tax base amount is equal to the total of certain specific tax amounts. The processing keys for the tax amounts to be totaled have to be specified for this withholding tax type in a separate activity in Customizing.

You can define dependencies between withholding tax types via the field’s reduced base amount or Inherit base. If the field Reduce base is selected in a withholding tax type, the withholding tax base amount is reduced by the withholding tax amount of the dependent type. Alternatively, you can select the field Inherit base. The withholding tax base amount then corresponds to the withholding tax amount of the dependent type. The final amount used for the withholding tax calculation is calculated by applying the proportion subject to tax (defined in the withholding tax code) to the base amount defined here in the withholding tax type. •

Rounding rules

You have the following options for rounding withholding tax amounts: • • • •

Commercial (W/tax comm. round.) Rounding up (Round w/tax amount up) Rounding down (Round w/tax amount)

Accumulation type

Here you define whether withholding tax base amounts and withholding tax amounts should be accumulated for this withholding tax type, and if so, for what period.

- 332 -


Version ECC 6.0 If the law permits withholding tax exempt amounts over a specific time period (for example, monthly, annually), the amounts posted in this period must be retained. This ensures that withholding tax is posted as soon as the exempt amount is exceeded. In the SAP System, this is reflected by accumulation. You can accumulate amounts for calendar years, quarters, or months. Since with accumulation, accumulated amounts are already included in the calculation of the withholding tax amounts for the current payment in the period, the accumulation cannot be used for summation. If you have activated accumulation for a withholding tax type, the accumulated withholding tax base amount in the current period (month, quarter, year) is added to the withholding tax base amount of the line item for which the withholding tax amount is to be calculated. The withholding tax amount is determined by applying the withholding tax rate or formula (scale) to this total, and subtracting the withholding tax amount accumulated in the period concerned. A formula is a series of staggered withholding tax rates valid for different withholding tax base amount intervals. The current withholding tax base amount and the tax amount itself are added to the corresponding values in the accumulation table. Accumulation is entered per customer/vendor account, withholding tax type, and withholding tax code in the local currency of the company code concerned. To prevent a withholding tax posting as soon as the accumulated withholding tax amount exceeds a defined maximum, select the field Acc. w/tax to max. •

Control data

Here you define

•

o

Whether manually entering the withholding tax base amount or the withholding tax amount is permitted during document entry

o

Whether you want to suppress withholding tax certificate numbering.

Information for regional withholding tax

You can enter regional codes here. The regional code ensures that the withholding tax is reported and paid to the relevant tax authorities. •

Definition of minimum and maximum amounts

Here you define whether you want to maintain minimum and maximum amounts at withholding tax type level or withholding tax code level.

PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆCalculationÆWithholding Tax TypeÆDefine Withholding Tax Type for Invoice Posting Database Table: T059P, T059U By the above PATH it will display the following window:

- 333 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button.

It will display another screen click on


In the above screen maintain parameters as I shown and click on screen:

- 334 -

next entry button so it will display the following


Version ECC 6.0


- 335 -



Version ECC 6.0


- 336 -



Version ECC 6.0



+

- 337 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen maintain parameters as I shown and click on screen:


After maintain the above all parameters click on save the button to save the activity. Back to SPRO screen. Define Withholding Tax Keys Systems object that you use to classify withholding tax items according to which section of the Income Tax Act they belong to. This information is required in TDS returns. Whenever you post a withholding tax item, assign it a withholding tax code as normal. Since each withholding tax code is also assigned to an withholding tax key, the system automatically knows which section of the Income Tax Act you have withheld the tax under. When you prepare a TDS return, it shows which section of the Income Tax Act you withheld each item under. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Basic SettingsÆ Define Withholding Tax Keys Database Table: T059O, T059OT By the above PATH it will display the following window:

- 338 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button. It will display another screen click on


In the above screen enter the section code and description. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen

- 339 -


Version ECC 6.0 Check Recipient Types A system object that you use to classify payment recipients as legal persons or natural persons, for the purposes of withholding tax reporting. For each withholding tax type, create two entries as follows:

• • •

Recipient Type

Text

CO

Companies

OT

Others

Country Version India comes with sample settings for the sample withholding tax types provided. Enter the recipient type in each vendor master and each customer master. The TDS returns separate the information about taxes withheld on legal persons and on natural persons.

PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Basic SettingsÆ Check Recipient Types Database Table: T059C, T059D By the above PATH it will display the following window:



- 340 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter Check Recipient Types along with W/Tax type, save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 341 -


Version ECC 6.0 Check Income Types In this activity you check the revenue types for the withholding tax report. You use the revenue type to classify your (foreign) vendors by revenue. You need the revenue types as a specification for the withholding tax report. 1. Check the list of revenue types in the standard system and make any necessary adjustments. 2. Store the revenue type in the withholding tax code under "Specifications for the withholding tax report". For more information on this, read the Check withholding tax code chapter. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Basic SettingsÆ Check Income Types Database Table: T059E, T059G By the above PATH it will display the following window:



In the above screen enter income types save the activity and back to SPRO screen

- 342 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Business Places PATH: SPROÆ Cross-Application ComponentsÆ General Application FunctionsÆ Nota fiscalÆ CNPJ Business PlacesÆ Define Business Places By the above screen it will display the following window:

In the above window enter Company Code and click on enter button. It will display another screen click on


In the above screen enter business place and description. Click on save button it will display the following window:

- 343 -


Version ECC 6.0

Enter above parameters and click on enter button and back to SPRO screen.

Define Section Codes A system object that represents the organizational unit responsible for collecting and remitting withholding tax, as identified by a TAN. Each company can have more than one TAN, so in the SAP system, a company code can also have multiple section codes. When you post a document with a withholding tax item (for example, a vendor invoice or a credit memo), enter the section code in order to make sure that the tax item is assigned to the correct TAN. In order to ensure that you always enter a section code, we recommend that you create a validation for this field. When you print withholding tax certificates, each of your section codes can define its own forms, depending on which format is required by the income tax office. The certificate supplied with the standard system also shows the address data from the section code. Each TAN holder files its own tax returns. When you prepare a TDS return, you enter the TAN holder’s section code on the selection screen. The annual returns then show only the withholding tax items that are assigned to that section code. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Basic SettingsÆ South KoreaÆ Define Section Codes

- 344 -


Version ECC 6.0 By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter Company Code and click on enter button. It will display another screen click on


In the above screen enter new section code and assign you business place which you created and click on save button so it will display the following window:

Enter above parameters and click on enter button. Back to SPRO screen.

- 345 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Business Places PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Basic SettingsÆ IndiaÆ Define Business Places In the display another screen click on


In the above screen assign section code to your company code. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Assign Factory Calendars to Business Places In this IMG activity, you effectively specify which days the tax offices that you work with are open. The system uses this information when you post a vendor invoice, so that it can allow for public holidays when it determines the tax due date. This activity is optional. If you do not make any entries, the system still determines the tax due date, but without reference to any factory calendar. You have maintained factory calendars for each of the calendars followed by the tax offices. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Basic SettingsÆ IndiaÆ Assign Factory Calendars to Business Places In the display another screen click on


- 346 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen with your company code assign section code, factory calendar and rule. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Maintain Tax Due Dates In this IMG activity, you maintain the various tax due dates. Because due dates can differ, depending on the withholding tax type and recipient type, you can maintain the dates at this level. Make sure that you maintain entries for all the recipient types that you use. For each permutation of official withholding tax key and recipient type, specify when the tax has to be remitted. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Basic SettingsÆ IndiaÆ Maintain Tax Due Dates In the display another screen click on


In the above screen to your country assign Official Tax key, Recipient type and no of tax due date days. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 347 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Withholding Tax Codes You define the tax base and rate in the withholding tax code. You make the settings for each country and withholding tax type. You can therefore define as many withholding tax codes as required for each withholding tax type. Country Version India comes with a sample tax code for each of the sample withholding tax types provided. The basicrate withholding tax codes are set to 2%; the surcharge tax codes are set to 0.4%. For reporting purposes, assign each withholding tax code to a withholding tax key. Make the following settings: •

General data Define the description of the withholding tax code, and where necessary, the official withholding tax key. Official withholding tax keys are used on official forms when reporting taxes,

•

Base amount

Define the portion to be taxed. This percentage rate is used to determine the final withholding tax base amount and is applied to the withholding tax base amount calculated as a result of the setting in the withholding tax type. •

Posting Define a posting indicator. This can have one of the following values: Value

Name

Description

1

Normal posting

The withholding tax amount is deducted from the vendor line item amount (posting at invoice entry) or from the payment amount (posting at time of payment), and the system creates a line item for the withholding tax.

2

Offsetting entry to G/L account/No reduction in subledger

The withholding tax amount is multiplied by the factor 1/(1-p), where p stands for the withholding tax rate of the withholding tax code. The system creates two withholding tax line items with opposing debit/credit signs. This option is incompatible with withholding tax scales. (This function is only relevant for Argentina, when using the "grossing up" option).

3

•

Offsetting entry to G/L account:

The system creates two withholding tax line items with opposing debit/credit signs.

Calculation Define the withholding tax rate or the information for using calculation scales (formulas).

- 348 -


Version ECC 6.0 For the withholding tax rate, you can enter either a percentage rate between 0 and 100, or you can enter a fraction. The system then uses this rate to calculate the withholding tax amount from the withholding tax base amount. If you set the indicator Withholding Tax Formulas, the system calculates the withholding tax amount from the withholding tax base amount using one of the scales defined for this withholding tax type/code combination. All calculations are made in the respective local currency. This means that you have to maintain the minimum and maximum for the withholding tax amount, the minimum base amount, the withholding tax exempt base amount, and the scales in the local currency of the company code. •

Reporting information Where necessary, define the region, the provincial code, and the type of income.

PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ CalculationÆ Withholding Tax CodesÆ Define Withholding Tax Codes Database Table: T059Z, T059ZT By the above PATH it will display the following window:



- 349 -


Version ECC 6.0

We configure in the above activity to calculate TDS of @2% on total value of invoice or contract amount or ect. In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button screen

so it will display the following

We configure in the above activity to calculate Surcharge on TDS @0.2000% on 2% of TDS value. In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button screen

- 350 -



Version ECC 6.0

We configure in the above activity to calculate Education Cess on TDS @0.044% on 2% of TDS value. In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button screen.


We configure in the above activity to calculate Education Cess on Surcharge @ 0.4400% on 0.200% of Surcharge value In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button screen.

- 351 -



Version ECC 6.0

We configure in the above activity to calculate Higher Education Cess @ 0.0220% on 2% if TDS value In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on next entry button screen.


We configure in the above activity to calculate Higher Education Cess @ 0.0220% on 0.20% of surcharge value In the above screen enter all parameters as I shown and click on save button to save entire activity, and back to SPRO screen

- 352 -


Version ECC 6.0 Portray Dependencies Between Withholding Tax Types PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ CalculationÆ Withholding Tax Base AmountÆ Portray Dependencies Between Withholding Tax Types Database Table: T059P, T059U By the above PATH it will display the following window:

In the above window enter country code and click on enter button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen each tax in withholding tax is liked with one number as “W/Tax type no” In the above screen double click on “N3 W/TAX EDUCATION CESS ON TDS” so it will display the following screen:

- 353 -


Version ECC 6.0 The above screen is “N3 - W/Tax of Education Cess on TDS” and this is calculate on TDS. TDS is with number “1” so we should assign that number to N3 as above. In the above screen assign no “1” to Depend. On type no field save the activity. When you save it will automatically display the following screen.

Now double click on “N4 – W/TAX EDUCATION CESS ON SURCHAGE” so it will display the following screen:

The above screen is “N4 – W/TAX EDUCATION CESS ON SURCHAGE” and that should calculate on “Surcharge”, surcharge is with number “2”.so we have assign number 2 to this tax as above. Save the activity and back to following screen:

- 354 -


Version ECC 6.0

In above screen double click on “N5 – W/TAX HIGHER EDUCATION CESS ON TDS” so it will display the following screen:

The above screen is “N5 – W/Tax Higher Education Cess on TDS” and that should calculate on TDS. The TDS is with number “1”. We have to assign that number to above tax as I shown. Save the activity and back to following screen.

- 355 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen click on “N6 W/TAX HIGHER EDUCATION CESS ON SURCHARGE” so it will display the following screen:

The above screen is with “N6 – W/Tax Higher Education Cess on Surcharge” and it should calculate on Surcharge. Surcharge is with number “2”. So it assigned number “2” to above tax in this screen. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Codes

If the legal requirements permit minimum, maximum, or exempt amounts for the withholding tax base amount or the withholding tax amount, you can define these here. All calculations are made in the respective local currency. This means that you have to maintain the minimum and maximum for the withholding tax amount, the minimum base amount, the withholding tax exempt base amount, and the withholding tax scales in the local currency of the company code. You can define the minimum and maximum amounts at one of two levels, depending on the setting on the corresponding withholding tax type for base amounts or withholding tax amounts . •

Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Types

•

Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Codes

Make the following settings: •

Withholding tax minimum amount

If the withholding tax amount calculated is lower than the minimum amount you specify here, then the system calculates the withholding tax amount as being zero. •

Withholding tax maximum amount

If the withholding tax amount calculated is higher than the withholding tax maximum amount you specify here, then the system uses this maximum amount in the withholding tax calculation.

- 356 -


Version ECC 6.0 •

Minimum base amount

If the withholding tax base amount is lower than the minimum base amount you specify here, then the system calculates the withholding tax amount as being zero. If the withholding tax base amount exceeds the minimum base amount specified here, the system uses the whole base amount to calculate the withholding tax (compare Withholding tax base exempt amount). •

Withholding tax base exempt amount (only possible at withholding tax code level)

If the withholding tax base amount is lower than the withholding tax base exempt amount, then the system calculates the withholding tax amount as being zero. If the withholding tax base amount exceeds the withholding tax base exempt amount specified here, then the system uses the base amount as reduced by the exempt amount for the withholding tax calculation. For accumulation, the total accumulated base amount is checked against the minimum base amount or the withholding tax base exempt amount. In contrast, the withholding tax amount as reduced by the values already accumulated is checked against the withholding tax minimum amount or the withholding tax maximum amount. PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ CalculationÆ Minimum and Maximum AmountsÆ Define Min/Max Amounts for Withholding Tax Codes Database Table: T059MINMAX By the above PATH it will display the following window:



- 357 -


Version ECC 6.0 The amount we gave in the above screen will be exempted from the basic while calculation of tax TDS. Now click on next entry

button for another entry as below:

In the above screen provide exemption amount for surcharge. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Assign Withholding Tax Types to Company Codes PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Company CodeÆ Assign Withholding Tax Types to Company Codes Database Table: T001WT It will display a screen click on


In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type “N1” to company code. Now click on next entry

button to assign next entry as below:

- 358 -


Version ECC 6.0





- 359 -


Version ECC 6.0





- 360 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen we assigned withholding tax type “N6” to company code. Now click on save button to save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Activate Extended Withholding Tax PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆ Extended Withholding TaxÆ Company CodeÆ Activate Extended Withholding Tax Database Table: By the above PATH it will display the following screen, in that screen click on display the following box

In the above box enter your company code and pres enter it will appears on the top to screen as below:

Flag the check box against to your company code to activate W.tax . Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 361 -

so it will


Version ECC 6.0

Creation of required G/L a/c’s for Withholding Tax The following 4 G/L account creates with following PATH: PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆMaster RecordsÆG/L AccountsÆIndividual ProcessingÆFS00 - Centrally

G/L a/c Number

Compan y .Code

Acc. Group

130000

1102

Liabilities

131000

1102

Liabilities

132000

1102

Liabilities

133000

1102

Liabilities

P&L Statement acct / Balance Sheet Account Balance Sheet Account Balance Sheet Account Balance Sheet Account Balance Sheet Account

Short Text / G/L Acct Long Text

Only balance in Local Currency

Open item Management

Line Item Display

Sort Key

Field Status Variant

Post Automatic ally only

TDS a/c

X

X

X

001

G001

X

Surcharge a/c

X

X

X

001

G001

X

Education Cess a/c

X

X

X

001

G001

X

Higher Education Cess a/c

X

X

X

001

G001

x

Define Accounts for Withholding Tax to be Paid Over PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆAccounts for Withholding TaxÆDefine Accounts for Withholding Tax to be Paid Over With the above PATH it will display the following window:

enter your company code it above window and click on enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 362 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen flag the check box as shown to W/tax Code, Type and save the screen so it will display the following screen:

This is your TDS G/L account This is your Surcharge G/L account This is your Education Cess G/L account This is your Higher Education G/L account

In the above screen we assign G/L accounts with respective W/Tax type and W/Tax code to transaction key “WIT”. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Specify Document Type (Accounts Payable) PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆ India Æ Remittance ChallansÆ Document TypesÆ Specify Document Type (Accounts Payable) Database Table: J_1IEWT_CUST It will display a screen click on


- 363 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter you Company Code and Document Type as “SA” (General Ledger Document Type). Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Remittance Challan A document, in India, that you present to a bank when depositing any form of withholding tax that you have retained. The challan states how much tax is being deposited. A separate challan is required for each form of withholding tax. Maintain Number Groups In this and the following IMG activities, you set up the numbering for the remittance challans. Since you must create one challan for the taxes in each section of the Income Tax Law (official withholding tax keys), and for separate tax offices (business place), you must create different number range objects for each permutation of official withholding tax key and business place. The procedure is as follows: 1. For each permutation of tax key and business place, create a number group. 2. For each number group, create a number range. 3. Assign each number group to a number range. In this activity, you group together the permutations of company code, business place, and official withholding tax key that you want to remit withholding tax for. You can assign the same group number to more than one permutation, if you need to. PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆ India Æ Remittance ChallansÆ Maintain Number Groups Database Table: J_1IEWTNUMGR_N It will display a screen click on


- 364 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen provide information like company code, section code, official W/Tax Key and new entry to Number Group. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆ India Æ Remittance ChallansÆ Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups Database Table: It will display a screen click on


in the above screen give number group as we created in previous step and IntNR (internal number assignment) any new entry. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 365 -


Version ECC 6.0 Maintain Number Ranges PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆ India Æ Remittance ChallansÆ Maintain Number Ranges By the above PATH it will display an screen click on screen:

button so it will display the following

In the above screen go to menu bar “Group + Insert” it will display the following window:

In the above box enter your Company Code and click on enter button so it will display the following window:

In the above window maintain text, mention present year and give any number interval. Click on enter button so the entry will appear in main screen below:

- 366 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen: Flag the check box of your number interval which you just created in the above screen. Double click on your Internal number range which you created in above step Now double click on “Element/Group”, so your number range will assign to your number range text as below:

Now save the above activity and back to SPRO screen.

Maintain Number Groups and SAPscript Forms In this IMG activity, you specify which SAP script forms you want to use to print the withholding tax certificates. These forms are used when you: •

Print withholding tax certificates for vendors

•

Print withholding tax certificates for customers

Country Version India comes with a form, J_1IEWTCERT, which you can use as the basis for creating your own forms. For each type of withholding tax (official withholding tax key): Specify which SAP script form you want to use If different tax offices require different forms, you can enter different forms for different offices.

- 367 -


Version ECC 6.0 Specify what number group you want for each certificate. This information determines which number range the system uses to number the certificates. You assign the number range to the number group in the next two activities. PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆ India Æ Withholding Tax Certificates for Vendors and Customers Æ Maintain Number Groups and SAPscript Forms It will display a screen click on


In the above screen maintain the parameters with SAP Script form and new number group. Save the activity back to SPRO screen.

Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆ India Æ Withholding Tax Certificates for Vendors and Customers Æ Assign Number Ranges to Number Groups It will display a screen click on


in the above screen give number group as we created in previous step and IntNR (internal number assignment) any new entry. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Maintain Number Ranges PATH: Financial Accounting (New)Æ Financial Accounting Global Settings (New)Æ Withholding TaxÆExtended Withholding TaxÆPostingÆ India Æ Withholding Tax Certificates for Vendors and Customers Æ Maintain Number Ranges

- 368 -


Version ECC 6.0 By the above PATH it will display an screen click on screen:

button so it will display the following

In the above screen go to menu bar “Group + Insert” it will display the following window:

In the above box enter your Company Code and click on enter button so it will display the following window:

In the above window maintain text, mention present year and give any number interval. Click on enter button so the entry will appear in main screen below:

- 369 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen: Flag the check box of your number interval which you just created in the above screen. Double click on your Internal number range which you created in above step Now double click on “Element/Group”, so your number range will assign to your number range text as below:

Now save the above activity and back to SPRO screen.

Maintain Company Code Settings - Excise Registrations PATH: SPTOÆ Logistics - General Tax on Goods MovementsÆ IndiaÆ Basic SettingsÆ Maintain Company Code Settings It will display a screen click on


- 370 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter your company code and First Month of Fiscal year. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 371 -


Version ECC 6.0 Assign Withholding Tax to Vendor Master Data PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ Accounts PayableÆ Master RecordsÆ Maintain CentrallyÆ XK02 – Change By above PATH it will display the following screen

In the above screen enter your vendor number, company code, purchase organization and flag the check box of “Withholding tax”, now click on enter button so it will display the following screen

These are all W/Tax ID’s issue by tax authorities optimal to assign

In the above screen enter the shown parameters like assigning all withholding type, codes to vendor. Save the vendor master data back to easy access screen.

- 372 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 373 -


Version ECC 6.0 Posting Vendor Invoice PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆDocument EntryÆF-43 - Invoice – General Transaction Code: F-43 In this case assume company had given a job work on contract to a person and that person is treated as vendor in sap. So today we are paying him total contract amount and deducting tax from that.

In above screen give dates, document type, period, company code, currency at bottom of screen vendor credit posting key and vendor number. After providing above information pres enter button it will display the following screen:

- 374 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen give contract amount, business place, section code, debit posting key and debit G/L account number and click on enter button it will display another screen as below:

In the above window it shows all taxes that are going to be affect. Just pres enter button or click on continue button so it will take you to below screen:

In the above screen give “*” symbol to amount field and “+” symbol to text field. Now click on

button so it will display the following screen.

- 375 -


Version ECC 6.0

NOTE: In the above screen enter Cost Center, Profit Center if create only, if don’t create them you can leave blank those fields In the above screen give information to business area, Cost Center, Profit Center, Segment, Functional Area and pres enter button or click on continue button. NOTE: If activated or configuration in CONTROLLING steps and created cost centers, profit centers then only you assign those fields or you can leave them blank. Now go to menu bar and click on “document + simulate” it will display the following screen:

- 376 -


Version ECC 6.0

To post above entry again go to menu bar “document + post” so it will post the entry and give following information:

In the above information it will show the document number and posted information. Back to easy access screen. Report PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆAccountÆFBL3N - Display/Change Line Items. Transaction code: FBL3N In the displayed select required all tax relevant G/L a/c number s and executive the screen it will display the following report screen

- 377 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 378 -


Version ECC 6.0 Create Remittance Challan PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆWithholding TaxÆIndiaÆExtended Withholding TaxÆRemittance of Withholding TaxÆJ1INCHLN - Create Remittance Challan Transaction code: J1INCHLN By above PATH it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter parameters as above like: 1) Company code 7) Vendor (Vendors numbers against whom we are paying tax) 2) Fiscal Year 8) Recipient Types (As we created in W/Tax Configuration) 3) Business Place/ Section Code 9) Document Date 4) Document Number (The number which is assigned to Posted document) 10) Posting Date 5) Posting Dates (Date when invoice is raised) 11) Bank Account (Your SBI check issue G/L a/c number) 6) Section (Tax section at which tax is deducted) 12) Business Area In the above screen enter all above information and click on “Executive” button so it will display the following box:

- 379 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above box select “Document Number” radio button and click on enter button or click on continue button so it will display the following screen:

In the window simple click on this button

In the above window it is showing all taxes which we are paying to bank for challan. Now click on back button simple so it will display the following window.

- 380 -


Version ECC 6.0

Double click on this line item

In the above window it shows one line item with an amount of Rs 1/- from “SBI Cheque issue G/L”, double click on that line item it will display the following screen:

In this field delete this Rs 1/- and give “*” symbol.

In the above screen it displays Rs 1/- in Amount line. Delete that Rs 1/- and give “*” symbol in that and pres enter button then go to menu bar “Document + simulate” so it will display the following window.

- 381 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window it shows payment of taxes to bank through SBI cheque issue to bank for challan. So it is a reversal entry of invoice in regard of taxes. Go to menu bar “Document + Post” to post the entry so it will display the following screen

In above screen it shows clearing and creating remittance challan. Back to easy access screen.

Report PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆGeneral LedgerÆAccountÆFBL3N - Display/Change Line Items. Transaction code: FBL3N In the displayed select required all tax relevant G/L a/c number s and executive the screen it will display the following report screen

- 382 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen you can view all open items of taxes are cleared.

- 383 -


Version ECC 6.0 Enter Bank Challan PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆWithholding TaxÆIndiaÆExtended Withholding TaxÆRemittance of Withholding TaxÆ J1INBANK - Enter Bank Challan Transaction code: J1INBANK By above PATH it will display the following screen:

Click on this F4 function to assign Challan clearing

In the above screen enter: 1) Company code, 2) Fiscal year, 3 Challan clearing number (Click on F4 function and select your latest or required challan number it will automatically display on screen and other 2 fields will fill automatically) 4) Bank challan number (give any new number that ma be alphanumeric), 5) Bank challan date, 6) Bank key (your house bank key). Now click on Executive button so it will display the following information:

In the above screen you can view the information of challan update.

- 384 -


Version ECC 6.0 Back to easy access screen.

- 385 -


Version ECC 6.0 Certificates Print PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts PayableÆWithholding TaxÆIndiaÆExtended Withholding TaxÆ CertificatesÆ J1INCERT - Print Transaction code: J1INCERT By above PATH it will display the following screen:

In the above screen: 1) Company code 2) Fiscal Year 3) Business Place / Section code 4) Section 5) Posting dates

6) Bank Challan Numbers 7) Bank Challan Dates 8) Vendors 9) Certificate Date 10) Signatory 11) Designation 12) Place of Printing Give all above information and click on execute button so it will display the following window:

- 386 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above window to “Output Device” field give “LP01” and flat check box “Print Immediately”. Now click on Print Preview. It will display the following report as TDS certufucate.

- 387 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 388 -


Version ECC 6.0

---------------------------------------------------***--------------------------------------------------

- 389 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 390 -


Version ECC 6.0

Define Posting Keys and Posting Rules for Check Deposit PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCheck DepositÆDefine Posting Keys and Posting Rules for Check Deposit Database Tables: T028D, T028E, T033F, T033G, T033I, T033J By the above PATH it will display the following box:

In the above box give your chart of accounts and pres on enter button or click on continue button so it will display another screen. Now click on


In the above screen enter 3 account symbols like “Main Bank, CheckDeposit, CheckIssue”. Pres enter button and save the activity. Now click on “Assign Accounts to Account Symbol” under Dialog Structure right side of the screen it will display the following screen click on

first:

- 391 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen we assigned G/L accounts to each account symbols which we created in first step above. Save the activity and click on “Create Keys for Posting Rules” and click on following screen:

button so it will display the

In the above screen give new posting rule for checkdeposit clearing, pres enter button and click on save button to save activity. Now double click on “Define Posting Rules” and click on

- 392 -



Version ECC 6.0

In this case General Entry will be as below: SBI Check Deposit G/L a/c Dr To Customer a/c

***** *****

In the above screen: Posting Rule Posting Area

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in “Create keys for posting rules step” : It specifies whether the entry should post to “Bank Accounts” or ”to Sub ledger Accounts”

Posting Key

: The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Debit side of G/L or Credit side of G/L. Acct Symbol : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted Document Type : It is which indicates the nature of entry Posting Type : Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 8: Clearing Credit Sub ledger Accounts. Save the above screen and back to SPRO screen: Create and Assign Business Transactions PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCheck DepositÆ Create and Assign Business Transactions. Database Tables: T028H, T028I In the following displayed screen click on


- 393 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen: Tran (Transaction): In this field you can give any new code + - Field : in this field take “+” symbol if bank balance increases like check deposit to house bank and take “- ” symbol when check issue that meat house bank balance decreases. Post.rule : Posting rule which we created in above steps with relevant to transaction assign in this field. In the above screen enter the parameters, save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Define Variants for Check Deposit PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆCheck DepositÆDefine Variants for Check Deposit By the above screen it will display a screen on that click on new entries screen:

button, it will display the following

In the above screen enter new variant, description in Name field and no of lines as “1”. Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 394 -


Version ECC 6.0

2) Double click on this line

1) Enter Lgth (Length) as 14 and pres enter button

3) Change this number to 06

4) Click on this continue button

In the above screen: 1. 2. 3. 4.

First enter 14 in Lgth field Click on “10- DIGIT CHECK NUMBER” line so it will display a small box as you saw above Change the “Output Lgth” to 06 Click on continue button or pres enter button

So it will insert a line under “Fields of the Variant” as below:



- 395 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen: First pres “Page Down” button on the key board so “Possible Fields” in above screen will drage up with other fields. 1. 2.

Double click on “CUSTOMER NUMBER” field so it will display the small box as above. In the box don’t change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.

It will add another line to “fields of the variant” as below



In the above screen: 1. 2.

Double click on “INVOICE REFERENCE” field so it will display the small box as above. In the box don’t change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.


- 396 -


Version ECC 6.0

2) Click on this continue button 1) Double click on this line


Double click on “INVOICE DATE” field so it will display the small box as above. In the box don’t change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.





Double click on “INVOICE DATE” field so it will display the small box as above. In the box don’t change any Length just pres enter button or click on continue button.

- 397 -


Version ECC 6.0 It will add another line to “fields of the variant”. Now click on save button to save the activity and take back to first screen as below:

In the above screen you can view your variant just created, keep the curser on that and click on activate back to SPRO screen.

- 398 -

button and


Version ECC 6.0 Post a sales invoice to customer To post one or moor sales transaction to customer use Transaction code: F-22 (For example assume I had posted an invoice to customer with an amount of Rs 15000/-) View the Report To view reports go to Transaction Code: FBL5N (Customer Line Items), FBL3N (G/L Lineitems) In these reports you can view openitem of customer invoices Enter check Deposit PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ BanksÆ IncomingsÆ Check DepositÆ FF68 - Manual Entry Transaction Code: FF68 By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen: Bank Key Bank Account Currency Group Transaction

: In this field enter your House Bank key (Check House Bank configuration) : In this field enter your Check Deposit bank account number (Check House Bank configuration) : Enter your Currency : Any new identification for the activity : The Check Deposit Transaction which your created in above step

With above details enter few other details like dates and other. After entering above all parameters Go to menu bar “Settings + Specifications” so it will display the following window:

- 399 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen: Start Variant : Select your variant which you created above step Cust.Matchcode ID : Select “D” which used to search customer by company code Processing Type : Select “4” which used to process the statement through online Now pres enter button two times so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen: Amount : Amount of customer invoice (customer openitem) Check : Check number which is given by customer Customer : Customer number Inv.ref : Invoice document number Doc.date: Document date After entering all items like above pres enter and save the screen it will automatically go back to first screen as below:

- 400 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen go to menu bar “Check deposit trans + Print + Individual list” so it will display the following window:

In the above window in “Output Device” field give “LP01”, flag check box “Print Immediately” and click on “Print preview”. It will display the following screen:

Back to main screen.

- 401 -


Version ECC 6.0

Again go to menu bar “Check deposit trans + Post + Individual List” so it will display the following screen:

It shows no of items posted and information related errors in transaction. Report To view reports go to Transaction Code: FBL5N (Customer Line Items), FBL3N (G/L Lineitems) In these reports you can view cleared item of customer invoices

- 402 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 403 -


Version ECC 6.0 With this function, you can manually enter bank account statements you receive. Statement entry is usually a two-step process: First, you enter the account line items in the system. Various tools are available to help you with this. You can vary the row format for entering individual transactions. In addition, the system supports individual account determination and checks data consistency. The second step is to post the line items you have entered. The account assignment variant can be changed at any time during processing. You can also enter more than one value in an account assignment field. The system highlights account assignment fields for which you do this. When you enter your data, payment advices created in SAP Cash and Liquidity Management using memo record entry can be automatically transferred to the bank statement. There are various selection criteria for doing this. For example, you can select all payment advices entered within a certain planning period or on a specific statement date. When you process the data, you can delete from the entry screen any memo records that do not match the bank account statement. If you entered the wrong beginning or ending balance, you can correct it in the entry screen. Posting Specifications In the manual bank statement function, you can create up to two postings for each line item. A bank account posting (for example, debit bank account and credit bank clearing account) A sub ledger posting (for example, debit bank clearing account and credit customer account with clearing) Define Posting Keys and Posting Rules for Manual Bank Statement PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆBusiness TransactionsÆPayment TransactionsÆManual Bank StatementÆ Define Posting Keys and Posting Rules for Manual Bank Statement By the above PATH it will display the following box:

In the above box give your chart of accounts and pres on enter button or click on continue button so it will display another screen. Now click on


- 404 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter bank related transaction as Accounts Symbols in above activity. Save the activity and double click on “Assign Accounts to Account Symbol” and click on It will display the following screen:

In the above screen to all your Account Symbols assign respective G/L accounts. Save the activity and click on “Create Keys for Posting Rules” and click on So it will display the following screen:

In the above screen create new posting rules as above.

- 405 -


Version ECC 6.0 Save the activity and double click on “Define Posting Rules” and click on So it will display the following screen:

In the above screen the G/L entry will as below: SBI Main Bank G/L a/c Dr To SBI Check Deposit G/L

***** *****

Fields should field as below: Posting Rule

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in “Create keys for posting rules step” for check deposit. Posting Area : It specifies whether the entry should post to “Bank Accounts” or ”to Sub ledger Accounts” Posting Key (Debit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Debit side of G/L or any other Acct Symbol(Debit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at debit side Acct Symbol(Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side Document Type : It is which indicates the nature of entry Posting Type : Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 5: Clearing Credit G/L Accounts. After entering above all parameters click on next entry


- 406 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen the G/L entry will as below: SBI Check Issue Clearing G/L a/c Dr ***** To SBI Main Bank G/L a/c

*****


: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in “Create keys for posting rules step” for Check issue clearing. Posting Area : It specifies whether the entry should post to “Bank Accounts” or ”to Sub ledger Accounts” Posting Key (Credit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Credit side of G/L or any other Acct Symbol(Debit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at debit side Acct Symbol(Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side Document Type : It is which indicates the nature of entry Posting Type : Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 4: Clearing Debit G/L Accounts. After entering above all parameters click on next entry


- 407 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen the G/L entry will as below: Bank Charges G/L a/c Dr ***** To SBI Main Bank G/L a/c ***** Fields should field as below: Posting Rule

: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in “Create keys for posting rules step” for Bank Charges. Posting Area : It specifies whether the entry should post to “Bank Accounts” or ”to Sub ledger Accounts” Posting Key (Debit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Debit side of G/L or any other Posting Key (Credit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Credit side of G/L or any other Acct Symbol (Debit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at debit side Acct Symbol (Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side Document Type : It is which indicates the nature of entry Posting Type : Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 1: Posting to G/L Account. After entering above all parameters click on next entry


- 408 -


Version ECC 6.0


: give the posting rule which we created in above screen in “Create keys for posting rules step” for Check Dishonor. Posting Area : It specifies whether the entry should post to “Bank Accounts” or ”to Sub ledger Accounts” Posting Key (Credit) : The Posting Key indicates whether the entry should go with Credit side of G/L or any other Acct Symbol (Credit) : Give the right Account Symbol which we created in first step in above screen. It indicates the G/L account which should be posted at Credit side Document Type : It is which indicates the nature of entry Posting Type : Which specifies about Purpose of the entry posting. In the above case 7: Posting to G/L Account. After entering above parameters click on save button to save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 409 -


Version ECC 6.0 Create and Assign Business Transactions PATH: SPROÆ Financial Accounting (New)Æ Bank AccountingÆ Business TransactionsÆ Payment TransactionsÆ Manual Bank StatementÆ Create and Assign Business Transactions Through above transaction it will display the following screen click on

:

In the above screen: Tran (Transaction): In this field you can give any new code + - Field : in this field take “+” symbol if bank balance increases like check deposit to house bank and take “- ” symbol when check issue that meat house bank balance decreases. Post.rule : Posting rule which we created in above steps with relevant to transaction assign in this field. In the above screen enter the parameters, save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Bank Statement PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ BanksÆ IncomingsÆ Bank StatementÆ FF67 - Manual Entry Transaction Code: FF67

- 410 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 411 -


Version ECC 6.0 With the payment program you can process local and international payment transactions involving your customers and vendors. With this program we can pay all vendor at a time(Who ever vendors you want to involve in payment program) Prerequisites The Payment Methods, House Banks, and Forms you use must be defined or adapted before the payment run is executed. If the above-mentioned steps are to be carried out automatically, the payment program requires the following information: •

Rules according to which it can determine the open items to be paid and, if expedient, group them together for payment. For example, you can specify grace periods for incoming items, which are taken into consideration when calculating the due date.

•

Specifications for selecting the payee. You can enter an alternative payee in your customer/vendor's master record or in the document itself.

•

Rules used by the payment program to select the payment methods. You can specify payment methods via your customer or vendor's master record or via the open items, or you can have the payment program select them using specified rules.

•

Rules used by the payment program to select the house bank from which the payment is made. House banks are banks where your company (company code) maintains accounts. You can specify a house bank in your customer/vendor's master record or in the line item, or you can have the payment program select it using specified rules.

•

Specifications for automatic postings. The payment program requires information such as document types, posting keys and accounts, in order to carry out the automatic postings.

You set the rules for controlling the payment program •

In the customer/vendor master record

•

In the line items

•

via configuration of the payment program

•

With individual specifications for each payment run

Process Flow 1.

It determines the open items to be paid and creates a proposal list. You can process the proposal list on-line. Among other things, you can change payment methods or banks, block items, or cancel payment blocks.

2.

The payment program carries out payment using the proposal list. The payment run includes only the open items contained in the proposal list. The payment program posts documents and provides the data for the form printout and for creating the data carriers, the payment advice notes and the payment summaries.

3.

It uses the print program to print the forms and create the data carriers.

- 412 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 413 -


Version ECC 6.0 Set Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions In this activity, you make specifications for all company codes involved in payment transactions. For each company code, you make the following specifications: Sending company code: The sending company code is the company code that is known to the business partner. When making cross-company code payments, you can specify the sending company code as well as the paying company code for each company code. If the sending company code is different from the paying company code, the system notes the sending company code in the payment transfer medium or payment advice. This note is information for the business partner. Furthermore, the sending company code affects how the system groups items from different company codes into one payment. Items are only grouped into one payment for company codes with the same paying company code and the same sending company code. If the sending company code is not specified, the system automatically regards the paying company code as the sending company code. Paying company code: You assign a paying company code to each company code. This means that you can have one company code process payment transactions centrally for several company codes. Separate payment per business area Use payment method supplements: Select the field if you wish to use payment method supplements, and then define the payment method supplements in the activity Define Payment Method Supplements. If you wish to display the Payment method supplement field in the line item display for customers and vendors, you can define the corresponding display variants. The same applies to the functions for displaying payments and paid items when displaying payment proposals. For this, choose the following activities: Define Line Layout •

Make Settings for Displaying Payments

•

Make Settings for Displaying Line Items

Cash discount and tolerance: The payment program uses these entries to determine the cash discount strategy for the company code. Special G/L transactions: Specify which special G/L transactions are to be settled for customers and vendors. Example: FPA F = Down payment request P = Payment request A = Down payment on current assets PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆBusiness TransactionsÆOutgoing PaymentsÆAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsÆPayment Method/Bank Selection for Payment ProgramÆSet Up All Company Codes for Payment Transactions

- 414 -


Version ECC 6.0 Database Table: T042 Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

:

In the above screen maintain the parameters as I shown, Save the screen and back to SPRO screen Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions In this activity, you make the following specifications for the paying company codes: Data for controlling the payment program: Here you specify the minimum amount for which an incoming or outgoing payment is created, for example. You can define additional amount limits for the payment method. To do so, choose the activity Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions. Specifications for paying with bills of exchange: You can show or hide the settings for paying with bills of exchange.

Forms and sender details for advice notes and EDI accompanying sheets: If you wish to print payment advice notes or an EDI accompanying sheet, specify the form name. Specify also the SAP script text modules that contain details about the sender that are to be printed on the payment advice note. You can go directly from this transaction to the transaction for editing forms and text modules. The standard system contains forms for payment advice notes and EDI accompanying sheets which you can copy and adjust to meet your requirements.

- 415 -


Version ECC 6.0 PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆBusiness TransactionsÆOutgoing PaymentsÆAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsÆPayment Method/Bank Selection for Payment ProgramÆ Set Up Paying Company Codes for Payment Transactions Database Table: T042B, T042T Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

In the above screen enter the above parameters and save the activity. Back to SPRO screen.

- 416 -

:


Version ECC 6.0 Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions

The payment method specifies the procedure, such as check, transfer or bill of exchange, by which payments are made. The following payment methods are usual in Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable: Payment Methods in the System Accounts payable

Accounts receivable

Check

Bank collection

Transfer

Bank Direct Debit

Postal giro transfer

Refund by check

Bills of Exchange

Refund by bank transfer

Check/bill of exchange

Bank bills Bill of exchange payment request

You define the payment methods in two steps: ... •

You first make all the specifications that are required for each payment method in each country. This is necessary for all the payment methods used by your organization in each country. If you have companies (company codes) in Germany, France and the USA for example, you define the payment method "check" for each country.

•

You then define the payment methods you use for each company code. When in this configuration function, you also specify the conditions of their use.

In this activity, you specify which payment methods are to be used in each country. You enter the following details for the payment method: Country-Specific Specifications for the Payment Method: •

Payment method either for incoming or outgoing payments

•

Characteristics for classifying payment method: Here you specify the type of payment method in question (such as check or bank transfer) and any other features of that payment method (the payment method is used for personnel payments, for example). When you select a payment method, only the characteristics that are appropriate for that payment method are displayed. This means that you can only select fields that are relevant for the selected payment method.

•

Required entries in master record: Here you determine which specifications in the master record control whether the payment method is used (such as bank details or collection authorization).

Note: If the required details have not been entered in the master record, the payment method cannot be used. •

Posting specifications: You specify how the payment is to be posted, for example (such as which document type is to be used).

- 417 -


Version ECC 6.0 You also specify which currencies are to be permitted, dependent on the country and payment method. If you leave the currency table blank, this means that all currencies are permitted. Note: If the payment method only allows payments in local currency, the system ignores any currencies specified. If you use the Payment Medium Workbench, read the documentation under Make Settings for Payment Medium Formats from Payment Medium Workbench in the section Payment Media. PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆBusiness TransactionsÆOutgoing PaymentsÆAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsÆPayment Method/Bank Selection for Payment ProgramÆ Set Up Payment Methods per Country for Payment Transactions Database Table: T042Z Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

:

In the above screen maintain above parameters, Save the activity and back to SPRO screen: Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions

- 418 -


Version ECC 6.0 In this activity, you specify which payment methods can be used per company code and determine the conditions under which a payment method should be used. •

Amount limits for payments within which the payment program can select the payment method

Note: You always have to specify a maximum amount, otherwise the payment method cannot be used. If you specify the payment method in an open item, the payment program ignores the amounts you enter here. •

Specifications for grouping items for payment (such as single payment for marked items)

•

Specifications for foreign/foreign currency payments

•

Specifications for optimizing bank selection

•

Specifications for the form to be used for the payment medium

•

Specifications for issuing payment advice notes

PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆBusiness TransactionsÆOutgoing PaymentsÆAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsÆPayment Method/Bank Selection for Payment ProgramÆ Set Up Payment Methods per Company Code for Payment Transactions Database Table: T042E Through above PATH it will display the screen click on

In the above screen maintain required parameters as above. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions

- 419 -

:


Version ECC 6.0 In this activity, you make settings that the payment program uses to select the banks or bank accounts from which payment is to be made. You define the following: Ranking order of banks: You specify which house banks are permitted and rank them in a list. Bank accounts: For each house bank and payment method (and currency, if required), you specify which bank account is to be used for payments. Available amounts: For each account at a house bank, you enter the amounts that are available for the payment run. You enter separate amounts for incoming and outgoing payments. Specifying available amounts enables you to control which bank account is to be used for payments. You can specify the amounts depending on the value date at the bank. Value date: You specify how many days elapse between the posting date of the payment run and the value date at the bank, dependent on the payment method, bank account, payment amount, and currency. You can have the system determine the value date, taking into account the bank calendar and any individual arrangements made with the bank. To do so, choose the activity Define Value Date Rules Fees/Charges: You define the charges that are printed on the bill of exchange forms (standard practice in Spain). PATH: SPROÆFinancial Accounting (New)Æ Accounts Receivable and Accounts PayableÆBusiness TransactionsÆOutgoing PaymentsÆAutomatic Outgoing PaymentsÆPayment Method/Bank Selection for Payment ProgramÆ Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions Database Table: T042A, T042D, T042I, T042V Through above PATH it will display the screen click on window:

it will display the following

In the above box enter your company code and click on continue button or click on enter button so your company code will appears on the top as below:

- 420 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen select your company code and click on “Ranking order”. It will display another screen click on

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on “Bank Account” It will display another screen click on

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on “Available Amounts” It will display another screen click on

- 421 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on “Value Date” It will display another screen click on

In the above screen enter required parameters and click on save button to save the activity, back to SPRO screen.

- 422 -


Version ECC 6.0 Assign Payment Method to Vendor Masters

In the master record you can either: •

Specify a single payment method, if, for example, you have already defined a specific payment method with a business partner, or

•

Specify multiple payment methods, one of which will be selected by the payment program according to your specifications during the payment run.

If you specify a payment method in the open items, it will override the specification in the master record. A payment method defined in the open items must not exist in the master record. The payment method with which you want to pay must always be specified in the customer or vendor master record or in the open item. NOTE: The following activity we have to do with all vendors or to those vendors to whom we want to pay through APP Change Vendor Master Data PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ Accounts PayableÆ Master RecordsÆ Maintain CentrallyÆ XK02 – Change Transaction code: XK02

In the above screen enter your vendor number, company code, purchase organization and flag the check box “Payment Transactions” so it will display the following screen:

- 423 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen assign your payment method to vendor master data which you created in above steps. Save the master data and back to easy access screen. NOTE: assign your payment method to your all vendor master data’s to whom you want to run the APP program

Post open items or post purchase invoice using Transaction Code: F-43 Using above transaction code post purchase invoices to more than 1 vendor like 2 or 3 vendors Look into the vendor report with Transaction Code: FbL1N Looking into the G/L report with Transaction Code: FBL3N In both cases you can view open items with all vendors and G/L’ Now we have to run “Automatic Payment Program” to clear all vendors at a time through check.

- 424 -


Version ECC 6.0 RUN PAYMENT PROGRAM

Selection of the Payment Method by the Payment Program Before every payment run you must specify which payment methods may be used in the payment run. If a payment method is specified in open items or in the master record of the customer/vendor and if that payment method is permitted for that payment run, the payment program selects this payment method. The payment method in the open items takes precedence over any payment method defined in the master record. If several payment methods are specified in the master record and none in the item, then the payment program selects a payment method. The program checks (in the sequence in which you entered them) whether each of the payment methods you specified for the payment run can be used. To be able to be used, a payment method must satisfy the following conditions (among others): • • • • • •

The payment method must be specified in the customer/vendor master record or open items. The master record must contain the specifications needed for the payment method. For foreign payments, the payment program checks whether the payment method in question allows payments to customer/vendors or banks located abroad. In the case of payments in foreign currency the payment method must be allowed for foreign currency payments. The permissible minimum and maximum amounts must be adhered to for the payment amount. For payment, a bank permissible for the payment method under consideration is determined.

If one of the specified payment methods meets all the above conditions, this payment method is used. Otherwise, the program carries out all the checks for the next payment method in the list you entered.

PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ Accounts PayableÆ Periodic ProcessingÆ F110 – Payments Transaction Code: F110 – Payments By above PATH it will display the following screen:

- 425 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen enter: Run Date: enter date when we running APP Identification: in this field enter new code to identify the activity Click on "PARAMETER" tab so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter: Posting Date Docs entered up to Customer item due by Company code Pmt Meths Next p/date Vendor

: Enter the date on which date the payment should be entered. : The date which you enter in this field till that date the open items will be picked for the APP process. : The date which you enter in this field till that date the open items will be picked for the APP process : Enter your company code. : Enter the Payment Method which you created in the above Steps. : In this field enter the next date when you want to run the APP again. : Enter all vendors numbers who you want to be paid through APP.

After entering above all parameters click on save button to save the activity. Now click on "STATUS" tab so it will display previous screen on it click on button, so it will display the following window:

- 426 -

(Schedule proposal)


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen flag the check box "Start Immediately" and pres enter button or click on continue button. It will display the following screen with following message:

In the above screen we can see the message was "Proposal is ready to be started" Now click on enter button continuously till the above message changes like below:

In the above screen the message changed as "Payment proposal has been created" Now click on

button so it will display the following window:

- 427 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window select "All accounting clerks" and pres enter button or click on continue button so it will display the following screen:

Double click on this line item first

In the above screen double click on first line so it will display the following screen:

Double click on this line item first

In the above screen double click on first line so it will display the following window:

- 428 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window click on "Reallocate" so it will display the another window as below:

In the above window enter: Payment method House Bank

: Enter your Payment Method as your created : Enter your house bank and bank account

Now pres enter button or click on continue button so it will display another screen now click on back button once it will take you to following screen:

- 429 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen now you can see the green symbol (in round) that indicates, that amount is can be paid. The process we have to do with all payments to what ever the payment's to be done. Now click on back button till we get following screen:

In the above screen under status tab you can see the new message "Payment proposal has been edited", Now click on "Printout/data medium" so it will display the following screen:

- 430 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter any variant to "RFFOAVIA" program and click on the following screen:

Program run date Identification Feature Paying company code No of sample printouts Print immediately

so it will display

: Enter the date when we are running this program : Enter any new identification code : Enter your company code : Make it zero all ways : flag this check box

In the above screen enter the parameters as i shown and click on screen:

- 431 -



Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter text to "Meaning" field, Click on save button to save the activity and click on back button till display the following screen:

In the above screen now enter any variant to "RFFOUS_C" program and click on so it will display the following window:

- 432 -

button


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter the parameters like: Program run date Identification Feature

: Enter the date when we are running this program : Enter any new identification code

- 433 -


Version ECC 6.0 Paying company code Payment Method House bank Account ID Check lot number Currency Print Control No of sample printouts Do not void any checks

: Enter your company code : Enter your Company using Payment Method : Enter your House Bank from which bank you want to pay : Enter your SBI check issue bank ID : Enter your House Bank Lot Number : Enter your company code currency : Enter printer and flag all check all check boxes : Make it zero : Flag this check box

After entering all above parameters as i shown click on


In the above screen enter text to "Meaning" field, and click on save button to save the activity now click on back button2 times it will display the following scdreen:

Now again click on save button and click on "STATUS" button so it will display that status screen. Click on


- 434 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above window flag the check box "Create Payment Medium" and click on continue button or click enter button so it will display the following message in status window as below:

In the above screen it display the message "Payment run is ready to be started" now pres enter button till you get following window:

- 435 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen the message will display as "Payment run has been carried out, Posting orders: 2 generated , 2 completed" Now click on


In the above window in the "Job Name" field instead symbol "?" give some name or identification. Now click on enter button or click on continue button so it will display the following message:

Now go to following PATH:

Go to menu bar "system + services + output control" so it will display the following screen:

- 436 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen just click on executive button so it will display the following screen:

Now in the above screen flag the check box and click on screen.

display content button so it will display the following

- 437 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 438 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 439 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 440 -


Version ECC 6.0 The above two letters are the corresponding letters with check information to different vendors. Now check with vendor report the line items will be automatically cleared. To check vendor line items go to transaction code: FBL1N Check also checks register as below: PATH: AccountingÆ Financial AccountingÆ Accounts PayableÆ EnvironmentÆ Check InformationÆ DisplayÆ FCHN - Check Register By above PATH it will display the following screen:

in the above screen enter parameters and click on executive button so it will display the following check information which we issued to vendor:

- 441 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 442 -


Version ECC 6.0 Dunning Procedures

If the business partners may fall behind on payments you can send them a payment reminder or a dunning notice to remind them of their outstanding debts. The SAP System allows you to dun business partners automatically. The system duns the open items from business partner accounts in which the overdue items create a debit balance. The dunning program selects the overdue open items, determines the dunning level of the account in question, and creates a dunning notice. It then saves the dunning data determined for the items and accounts affected. You can use the dunning program to dun both customers and vendors. It may be necessary to dun a vendor if he or she has a debit balance as a result of a credit memo. If a customer is also a vendor, you can offset the account balances against one another. If you wish to use the automatic dunning procedure, you have to make settings in the following places before using the system and while it is operational: • • •

· · ·

In Customizing for Financial Accounting (IMG) In the master data for your customers or vendors When you post documents

Once you have decided in which countries you wish to use the automatic dunning procedure, adjust your settings to meet the country-specific business requirements. In the USA, for example, debtors are not usually dunned. In Customizing, you can make company code-specific settings so that the fields for dunning are hidden for the company code USA. You use the following attributes to control the dunning program, and you can configure them according to the needs of your company:

• •

·

DUNNING PROCEDURE

The dunning procedure controls how dunning is carried out by the system. You can define as many dunning procedures as you like. • • •

·

DUNNING LEVEL

The dunning levels are calculated based on the number of days open items are in arrears. You can also have the system calculate the dunning levels based on the dunning amount or a percentage paid (sales-related dunning level determination). • • • •

You can determine more than one dunning level per dunning procedure. ·

DUNNING AREAS

A dunning area is an organizational unit within a company code used for the dunning process. A dunning area can be a division or a sales organization. You assign a dunning area to an open item when you are posting. You can dun items separately by dunning area. •

- 443 -


Version ECC 6.0 The SAP System allows you to use either the automatic dunning program, which duns all overdue items in accordance with your selection criteria, or, if required, you can dun individual customers or vendors You have the following options and functions for dunning: Payment deadline, interest on arrears, and dunning charges Dunning currency

Cross-company code dunning

Dunning for relationships

head

Dunning one-time accounts

Dunning history

office/branch

You can enter a specific payment deadline in the dunning notice, as well as interest on arrears and dunning charges (both calculated by the dunning program). If all the open items in an account have been posted in the same currency - either local currency or a foreign currency, the dunning program uses this currency. Otherwise, the dunning program uses the local currency of the company code. The items are displayed in document currency in the dunning notice, and the totals in local and foreign currency. You can combine the overdue items for one customer or vendor from several company codes in one dunning run, and issue the items in one dunning notice. If your customer or vendor has both a head office and branch offices, dunning notices are sent to the head office. However, you can also send dunning notices to the branch offices. You can dun a one-time account just like any other business partner account. All the items for a one-time account that have the same address are grouped in one dunning notice. The dunning date and level are updated in the item, not in the account master record. The dunning history provides you with information on all of the dunning runs you have executed and the dunning notices you have sent (overdue items, dunning totals, and so on). If required, you can also select by account type, company code, and/or customer or vendor.

- 444 -


Version ECC 6.0 STEP 1: PATH: SPRO->Financial Accounting (New) ->Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) ->Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable->Business Transactions->Dunning-> Dunning Procedure-> Define Dunning Procedures. Transaction code: FBMP The following screen will appear:

Pres on New Procedure

the following screen appear and fill the required fields.

In the above screen enter:

Dunn.Procedure Name

: In this field enter new procedure code or any identification : In this field give any description or text

- 445 -


Version ECC 6.0 Dunning Interval in Days : Enter the number days required between each dunning level No.of dunning levels : Enter required no of dunning levels (Max of 9 dunning levels) Standard transaction dunning : flag this check box Ref.Dunning procedur for texts: enter same identification which we enter in Dunn.procedure field Now click on Dunning Levels

button so it will take to following screen.

in the above screen flag all check boxes against to 1. calculate interest, 2. Always dun, 3. Print all items now click on Charges Button

. It will display the following window.

In Currency field give required currency and click on continue button

- 446 -

.The following screen appears.


Version ECC 6.0

In above screen give dunning levels as many we maintain and charges for each dunning level as I did in above screen click on Minimum Amounts

button so it will go to the following screen.

It will display the following window.

In Currency field give required currency and click on continue button

- 447 -



Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen fill the required fields and click on Dunning texts will appears.

button. The following window

In this fill your company code and select Customer and click on continue button


button so it will display small widow as

In the above screen pres on New company code below:

1102

Give your company code and continue button

so your company code will appears on top of screen.

- 448 -


Version ECC 6.0

Flag the check boxes of 1. Dunning by dunning area, 2. Separate notice per dunning level. Save the screen and pres on back button. Now click on Dunning texts

button the following window will appear.

Click on this F4 functionality so it will opens another screen as follow.

If you click on this F4 functionality the following screen appears.

Click on this Dunning Form

- 449 -


Version ECC 6.0 If you click on above dunning form it will display the following screen.

Now double click on “Language EN Activ original language” so it will copy the form automatically to fields. as follow.

Now pres on back button

, so it will take to 1st screen now pres on save

STEP 2:

- 450 -

button.


Version ECC 6.0 Assign Dunning to Customer Master TRANSACTION CODE: XD02 Not go to customer change screen (xd02) and assign dunning procedure to all the customer masters to whom you want to be involved in dunning procedure as follow.

STEP 3: TRANSACTION CODE: F-22 Not post some credit sales invoices in past dates to customers to whom you want to be involved in this process.

RUN THE DUNNING PROCESS The automatic dunning program runs according to the dunning process described below. It enables you to regularly check your ledgers for overdue receivables, and then create payment reminders for these business partners. Process Flow The dunning process consists of several sub processes that must be carried out in a specific order (see figure below).

- 451 -


Version ECC 6.0

Creating Dunning Proposals Start the dunning program and enter the company codes for the dunning run. You can restrict the selection to specific accounts. During the dunning run, the dunning program determines the accounts and items that must be dunned, the dunning level, and all other details required for dunning. The dunning program creates a dunning proposal list. The dunning proposal list can be created as often as required since the dunning data for the item and in the account is not updated until the dunning notices have been printed. Only those accounts that contain a dunning procedure in the master record are included in the dunning run.

Editing Dunning Proposals You can edit the dunning proposal as follows: • • •

Set dunning blocks Reset dunning blocks Change dunning levels

Printing Dunning Notices The print program prints the dunning notices. At the same time, the relevant dunning data is stored in the items and the master record of the business partner.

- 452 -


Version ECC 6.0 The dunning forms and texts that you use must be defined or adapted before the dunning run is executed. You determine the items and accounts to be dunned and the dunning texts when you configure the dunning program. This involves defining rules governing how the program determines the data it needs. During the dunning run, the dunning program determines all customer (and vendor) items and accounts for which dunning notices can be issued. This is the basis of the dunning proposal. The dunning proposal is output in the form of a list that contains all items and accounts for which dunning notices can be issued (that is, they are overdue). The list is sorted according to account and dunning level. You can process the dunning proposal further. Make sure that you have made the settings for the following features: • • • • •

Dunning procedure Company code data Dunning data in the customer master record (or vendor master record) Blocking of open items (if required) Dunning parameters

You control the dunning program via the settings you make for the dunning procedure. Further control can be exercised via the settings you make in the customer or vendor master record, via the open items, and by the parameters for the dunning run. You control dunning via: · Company Code-Specific Specifications: One of the factors these specifications determine is which company codes are dunned. · Dunning Procedure This contains the most important specifications for controlling dunning. These include the dunning frequency, the dunning levels, and the grace days for the due date determination. · Customer/Vendor Master Record In the master record, you specify which dunning procedure should be used for that account. The dunning program stores the date of the last dunning run and the dunning level in the master record. If an account is not to be dunned, enter a dunning block.

· Open Items You can block items from being dunned, or specify that an item is only to be dunned up to a certain dunning level. The dunning program notes the date of the last dunning run for the item and the dunning level. · The Parameters for the Dunning Run. These include the company codes and accounts that are to be checked during the dunning run, and the posting date up to which documents should be taken into account.

- 453 -


Version ECC 6.0 The automatic dunning program uses these criteria to check the items and accounts for the following: • • •

Whether they are overdue Charges and interest Dunning levels

The dunning program duns open items in customer and vendor accounts if the overdue items result in a debit balance. When you configure the dunning program, you can specify additional criteria for determining whether accounts or their open items are to be dunned. You make the most important specifications via the dunning procedure. You define this procedure with a four character alphanumeric key. It determines: · The dunning frequency and/or the dunning interval with which accounts are dunned. · The grace days and the minimum numbers of days in arrears for the purposes of determining whether the open items and accounts should be dunned. This data is used only to determine the due date of the open items and whether an account should be dunned. · The number of dunning levels. For each dunning level, you determine the number of days a line item must be in arrears to be assigned a particular dunning level. This dunning level then determines the wording of the dunning notice. · The transactions to be dunned. You can select whether standard and/or special G/L transactions are dunned with the same procedure. Examples of special G/L transactions are payment requests, bill of exchange payment requests, down payments, and down payment requests. Bill of exchange payment requests are used in Spain, France, and Italy. You can set up one or more dunning procedures. Several procedures are necessary if you want to dun accounts differently according to the above mentioned criteria. You specify which procedure is used for an account in the master record of the account concerned. Enter this procedure in the company code-specific area. Although you never send more than one payment reminder to certain of your customers, you send up to three different dunning notices to all other customers. As a result, you define two dunning procedures: A single-level procedure and a 3-level procedure. Enter the single level dunning procedure in the master records of customers who should receive only one payment reminder. Assign the 3-level dunning procedure to all other customers.

STEP 4: PATH: Accounting->Financial Account in->Accounts Receivable->Periodic Processing->F150 – Dunning. By the above PATH it will display the following screen:

- 454 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter information: Run on : Enter date when you are running the program Identification : Enter any new identification name In the above screen under Status box you can view the information message "No parameters maintained" After maintain above information click on "Parameter" tab so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen maintain parameters like: Dunning Date : Give the date when you are running dunning program Document posted up to : Give the date till the customers open items should be picked for the dunning process Company code : Give your company code Customer : Give the customer range that whom you want to involve in the dunning

- 455 -


Version ECC 6.0 After you maintain above parameters save the screen and click on status tab to go back. It will display the following screen:

In the above screen the message under Status was changed to "Parameters were maintained" Now click on


In the above window to "Output Device" field give "LP01" default printer and click on continue button or click on enter button so it will display the following window:

In the above screen: Start date : Maintain date Start Immediately: Flag that check box

- 456 -




In the above screen under the Status window it will display the information like: "Dun.Selection scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19.01.38 Dun.selection is scheduled" now click on enter button till above message change as below: "Dun.Selection scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19.01.38 Dun.selection is complete" It will display the following window with different options:

in the above window click on

button so it will display the following small window:

- 457 -


Version ECC 6.0

Just pres enter key or click on continue button so it will display the following list screen:

The above screen will display all list of invoices and othe details which are coming into dunning process in this program: Now click on back button so go back to main screen and click on following small window:

so it will display the

In the above window to "Output Device" field give "LP01" default printer and click on continue button or click on enter button so it will display the following window:

- 458 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen just click on "Print" button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen under Status window it will display new message as: "Dun.printout scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19:13:27 Dun.printout is scheduled" Now click on enter button till the above message changes as below: "Dun.printout scheduled for 22.07.08 at 19:13:27 Dun.printout is complete" so it will display the following screen:

- 459 -


Version ECC 6.0 in the above screen click on "Dunn.history" button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen: Account type Company code Customer

: In this field give customer id "D" : Give your company code : Give Customer range who are involved in dunning

After entering above information click on executive button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen keep your curser on customer line item and click on So it will display the following window:

- 460 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen click on

so it will display 1st dunning letter as below:

- 461 -


Version ECC 6.0

the above letter is 1st dunning letter to display next dunning letter click on back button till you get following screen:

- 462 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen click on


Enter "Output Device" as "LP01" and click on continue button so it will display the following screen

In the above window:

Company code Customer Run on Dunning date Document posting up to

: Give your company code : Give your customer to whom you are running 2nd dunning letter : : Enter future dates (according to the intervals maintain between dunning levels) :

After maintaining above information click on letter.

button so it will display the following another dunning

- 463 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 464 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 465 -


Version ECC 6.0 Activities Required in Enterprise Structure, Assignment 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15)

Define Sales Organization Define Distribution Channel Maintain sales office Maintain sales group Define Shipping Point Assign sales organization to company code Assign distribution channel to sales organization Assign division to sales organization Set up sales area Assign sales office to sales area Assign sales group to sales office Assign sales organization - distribution channel – plant Assign sales area to credit control area Define Rules By Sales Area Assign shipping point to plant

Define Condition Types PATH: SPROÆSales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆPricingÆPricing ControlÆDefine Condition Types Transaction code: VOK0 Database Table: T685, T685A, T685T By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen click on “Maintain Condition Types”. So it will display the following screen: In the following screen click on


- 466 -


Version ECC 6.0


(Next) button.


- 467 -


Version ECC 6.0

the above screen maintain parameters like Access sequence, Condition type, Condition class, Calculation type, Condition Category and click on

(Next) button.


- 468 -


Version ECC 6.0


(Next) button.


- 469 -


Version ECC 6.0


(Save) button to save the activity.

Back to SPRO screen. Define Access Sequences PATH: SPROÆSales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆPricingÆPricing ControlÆDefine Access Sequences. Transaction Code: VOKX By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 470 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen double click on “Maintain Access Sequences”. It will displays a screen on that click on An small box will appears as below:

.

In the above box provide “Access Sequence” as “MWST” and click on enter button. It will display Access Sequence on the top of window as below:

In the above screen select MWST and click on “Accesses” under Dialog Structure. So it takes to another screen click on

so it will display as below:

- 471 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen give “40” to “NO” field and “368” to “TAB” field and pres enter button twice. Now select your line which you enter above and click on “Fields” under Dialog Structure so it will display following screen:

Just save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Define And Assign Pricing Procedures PATH: SPROÆSales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆPricingÆPricing ControlÆ Define And Assign Pricing Procedures Transaction Code: DFP4 Database table: T683, T683S, T683T, T683U By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 472 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen double click on “Maintain Pricing Procedures”. It will display a screen on that click on A small box will appear as below:

.

In the above screen give “RVAA01” for “Procedure” field and pres enter button so it will appears at the top of window:

In the above screen select “Procedure” RVAA01 and click on

- 473 -

copy button so it will display the following screen:


Version ECC 6.0

In the above first change the name of “Procedure, Description” and click on enter button so it will display another small window as I shown above on that click on “Copy all” it will display an information message box just click enter button. It will also display few warning messages just keep pressing enter button and at last save the activity. It will display the following screen

In the above screen select your pricing procedure and click on “Control Data” under Dialog Structure.

- 474 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen: 1) To select all steps click on select all button 2) Now De-Select required steps as I given step numbers below: STEP CTYP Description a. 11 - PR00 - Price b. 101 - KA00 - Sales Promotion c. 104 - K007 - Customer Discount d. 105 - K004 - Material e. 908 - Net Value f. 940 - VPRS - Cost g. 950 - Profit Margin 3) After you De-Select above Condition types now click on Delete button will be deleted and De-Selected conditions will be there only. 4) Now save the activity and click on

. So all selected Condition types

button in the same screen.

It will display the following screen:

- 475 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen we assign the Condition, Fro (From), To value and save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Define pricing Procedure Determination PATH: SPROÆSales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆPricingÆPricing ControlÆ Define And Assign Pricing Procedures Transaction Code: OVKK Database table: T683, T683S, T683T, T683U, T683V By above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on “Define Pricing Procedure Determination”. so it will display another screen in that click on

it will go with following screen:

In the above screen we assign value like: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Sales organization Distribution Channel division Document Pricing Procedure Customer pricing Procedure

- 476 -


Version ECC 6.0 6. 7.

Pricing Procedure Condition Type

After entering all above values save the screen and back to SPRO screen.

Define Tax Determination Rules PATH: SPROÆ Sales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆTaxesÆDefine Tax Determination Rules Transaction Code: DFS1 Database Table: TSTL By above transaction it will display the following screen click on

it will go with following screen:

In the above screen we assigned our Tax Conditions to country. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen: Define Regional Codes PATH: SPROÆ Sales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆTaxesÆ Define Regional Codes Transaction Code: OK09 Database Table (Regional Codes): T005E, T004F Database Table (City Codes): T685, T685A, T685T By the above screen it will display the following screen:

- 477 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen double click on “Define County Code”. Click on

in displayed screen as below:

Save the activity and click on back button till you get following screen:

In the above screen double click on “Define City Code” Click on


In the above screen enter above values. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Assign Delivering Plants For Tax Determination Define Regional Codes PATH: SPROÆ Sales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆTaxesÆ Assign Delivering Plants For Tax Determination Transaction Code: OVK6 Database Table: T001W

- 478 -


Version ECC 6.0 By the above screen it will displays a screen now click on

it will display the following box:

In above box enter you plant number and click on enter button so it will display on top to window as below:

In the above screen select your plant and click on details button So it will display the following screen:

.

To assign Country, City code click on F4 function an assign.

In the above screen assign “Country Code”, “City Code”. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 479 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 480 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records PATH: SPROÆ Sales and DistributionÆBasic FunctionsÆTaxesÆ Define Tax Relevancy Of Master Records Transaction Code: OVK3 Database Table: TSKD, TSKDT By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on “Customer Taxes”, it will display other screen: Click on


In the above screen maintain values as I shown. Save the activity and click on back button till you get following screen: Transaction Code: OVK4 Database Table: TSKM, TSKMT

- 481 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen double click on “Material Taxes”, it will display other screen: Click on


Enter the above values, save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Check Master Data Relevant For Account Assignment PATH: SPROÆSales and DistributionÆ Basic FunctionsÆ Account Assignment/CostingÆ Revenue Account DeterminationÆ Check Master Data Relevant For Account Assignment Transaction Code: OVK5 Database Table: TVKM, TVKMT

- 482 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen double click on “Materials: Account Assignment Groups” so it will display the following screen Click on


In the above screen enter values and save the activity. Click on back button till you get following screen: Transaction Code: OVK8 Database Table: TVKT, TVKTT

In the above screen double click on “Customers: Account Assignment Groups” ” so it will display the following screen Click on


- 483 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above enter relevant values. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Define And Assign Account Keys PATH: SPROÆSales and DistributionÆ Basic FunctionsÆ Account Assignment/CostingÆ Revenue Account DeterminationÆ Define And Assign Account Keys Transaction Code: OK11 Database Table: T687, T687T

In the above screen double click on “Define Account Key”, so it will display the following screen: Click on


In the above screen enter values as above.

- 484 -


Version ECC 6.0 Save the activity and click on back button till you get the following screen: Database Table: T683S

In the above screen double click on “Assign Account Key”, so it will display the following screen: Click on

in displayed screen as below, it will display small box as below:

In the above box enter the required information and pres enter button so your pricing procedure will appears at the top of screen as below:

In the above screen enter Account Keys to “ActKy” field which we prepare in the first step and save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 485 -


Version ECC 6.0 Assign G/L Accounts PATH: SPROÆSales and DistributionÆ Basic FunctionsÆ Account Assignment/CostingÆ Revenue Account DeterminationÆ Assign G/L Accounts Transaction Code: OK15 Database Table: C001 By above transaction code it will display the following screen:

In the above screen select “1 – Cust.Grp/Material Grp/AcctKey” and click on details button line. So it will display another screen as below: Click on

:

In the above screen the entries are: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Application Condition Type Chart of Accounts Sales Organization Account Assignment Group for Customer Account Assignment Group for Material Account key G/L Account.

- 486 -

or double click on that


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen we assign the relevant G/L account with respect to Account key. Save the activity and back to previous screen as below:

So it will display another screen as below: Click on

:

In the above screen maintain parameters like: 1. Application 2. Condition Type 3. Chart of account 4. Sales Organization 5. G/L Account Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Assign Shipping Points PATH: SPROÆLogistics ExecutionÆShippingÆBasic Shipping FunctionsÆShipping Point and Goods Receiving Point DeterminationÆAssign Shipping Points Transaction Code: VOL2 Database Table: TVSTZ By the above transaction code it will display the following screen, so click on

- 487 -

:


Version ECC 6.0

Enter the above values and save the screen. Back to SRO screen. Partner Determination PATH: SPROÆ Sales and DistributionÆ Basic FunctionsÆ Partner DeterminationÆ Set Up Partner Determination Transaction Code: VOPA Database Table: TKUPA, TPAER, TPAKD, TVPAG, TVPG By the above transaction the following screen will display:

In the above screen double click on “Set up Partner Determination for Customer Master” so it will display the following screen click on

and provide following information:

- 488 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen provide “Part.Det.Proc” with 4 digit code and save the activity. Now select your Partner determination and double click on “Partner Functions in Procedure” under Dialog Structure. It will display the following screen, on that click on

.

In the above you assign partner functions pres enter and save the activity. Now double click on “Partner Determination Procedure Assignment” it will display the following small box:

It will display the following screen; on that click on

In this box give your customer account group and click on enter button so it will appear on the top of the screen as below:

- 489 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen you assign Partner determination to Account group, save the activity. Now double click on “Account Groups – Function Assignment” under Dialog Structure. It will display another screen in that click on


In the above screen we assign partner functions to Account Group. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Creation of Customer Master PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts ReceivableÆMaster RecordsÆMaintain CentrallyÆXD01 – Create Transaction Code: XD01 The customer master is under 3 mages categories: 1) General Data a) Address b) Control Data c) Payment Transaction d) Marketing e) Unloading Points f) Export Data g) Contact Person 2) Company Code Data a) Account Management b) Payment Transaction c) Correspondence d) Insurance 3) Sales Area Data a) Sales b) Shipping c) Billing Document d) Partner functions Click on above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 490 -


Version ECC 6.0

1) Click on this Account Group Overview button.

3) Double click on this Group code

2) Type your customer Account group

In the above screen click on Account Group Overview Button so it will display the another screen as I shown above. In the second screen enter your Account Group and pres enter button. Your Customer account group will appear on the top of the screen just double click on the that. The following screen will appear:

Enter your company code 1) Click on this button 3) Double click on this sales organization 2) Enter your Sales organization code

1102

In the above screen enter your company code. Click on “All Sales areas…” button, so it will display another screen as above.

- 491 -


Version ECC 6.0 Enter your sales organization in the field and pres enter button. It will display your sales organization at the top of screen. Now double click on your sales organization it will display the following screen.

Now pres enter button or click on continue button. It display customer master screen as below:

In the above we enter the customer address or communication details under “Address” tab. Click on “Payment Transactions” tab and values as below:

- 492 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter customer bank details under “Payment Transactions” tab Now pres on “Company Code Data” button it will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter “Recon.Account”, “Sort Key” under “Account Management” tab and click on “Payment Transactions” tab, values as below:

- 493 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter “House Bank” under “Payment Transactions” tab, now click on “Sales Area Data” button it will display as below

- 494 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen provide all required information as I shown above under “Sales” tab and click on “Shipping” tab, and values as below:

In the above screen provide all required information as I shown above under “Shipping” tab and click on “Billing Documents” tab, and values as below:

- 495 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen provide all required information as I shown above under “Billing Documents” tab and click on “Partner Functions” tab, and values as below:

- 496 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen as we maintain Partner determination the partner functions will assigh automatically. Now save the customer master. It will issue the following message:

Back to easy access screen. Maintain Company Codes for Materials Management PATH: SPROÆ LogisticsÆ GeneralÆMaterial MasterÆBasic SettingsÆMaintain Company Codes for Materials Management Transaction code: OMSY By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on following box:


In the above box enter your company code and pres enter button. Your company code will appears on the top of screen as below:

In the above screen against to your company code enters: 1. Fiscal Year 2. Period (the month which you are working now) 3. Flag the check box “ABp” Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Define Attributes of Material Types PATH: SPROÆ LogisticsÆ GeneralÆMaterial MasterÆBasic SettingsÆ Material TypesÆ Define Attributes of Material Types

- 497 -


Version ECC 6.0 Transaction code: OMS2 Database table: T134M By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on following box:


In the above box enter Material Type “FERT” and pres enter button. The material Type “FERT” will appears on the top of screen as below:

In the above screen select “MTyp - FERT” and double click on “Quantity/Value updating” under Dialog structure.

so it will display the following box:

It will display another screen click on

In the above box enter “Valuation Area (Your Plant Code)” and pres enter so it will appears at top of screen as below:

- 498 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen against to your “Valuation Area and Material type” flat the 2 check boxes “Qty Updating, Value updating”. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 499 -


Version ECC 6.0 Define Material Groups PATH: SPROÆ LogisticsÆ GeneralÆMaterial MasterÆ Settings for Key Fields Æ Define Material Groups Transaction code: OMSF Database table: T023, T023T By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on

so it will display the following Screen:

In the above screen enter material group name and description. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

Plant Parameters PATH: SPROÆ Materials ManagementÆ Inventory Management and Physical InventoryÆ Plant Parameters Database Table: T159L By the above transaction it will display a screen in it click on

- 500 -

so it will display the following Screen:


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter shown parameters. Save the activity and back to SPRO screen.

- 501 -


Version ECC 6.0 Group Together Valuation Areas PATH: SPROÆ Materials ManagementÆ Valuation and Account AssignmentÆ Account DeterminationÆ Account Determination Without WizardÆ Group Together Valuation Areas Transaction code: OMWD It will display an screen click on

so it will display the following box:

In the above box enter “Valuation Area (Your Plant Code)” and pres enter so it will appear at top of screen as below:

In the above screen assign “0001” as Valuation Grouping Code to your Valuation Area (Plant). Save the activity and back to SPRO screen. Configure Automatic Postings PATH: SPROÆ Materials ManagementÆ Valuation and Account AssignmentÆ Account DeterminationÆ Account Determination without WizardÆ Configure Automatic Postings Transaction code: OMWB, OBYC In the following window just click on “Cancel” button.

- 502 -


Version ECC 6.0 It will display the following screen:

In the above screen click on “Account Assignment” so will display the following screen:

In the above screen double click on “AUM – Expense/Revenue from stock Transfer”

In the box enter your Chart of Account and click enter button it will display the following screen:

- 503 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen flag the check boxes of “Debit/Credit, Valuation Modif, Valuation Class” and save the screen and click on “Accounts” Button. It will display the following screen:

In the above screen enter values as I shown, save the activity and back to following screen as below:

In the above screen double click on “BSV – Change in Stock Account”


- 504 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen flag the check boxes of “Debit/Credit, Valuation Modif, Valuation Class” and save the screen and click on “Accounts” Button. It will display the following screen:


- 505 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen double click on “BSX – Inventory Posting”


In the above screen flag the check boxes of “Debit/Credit, Valuation Modif, Valuation Class” and save the screen and click on “Accounts” Button. It will display the following screen:

- 506 -


Version ECC 6.0


In the above screen double click on “GBB – Offsetting Entry for Inventory Posting”


- 507 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen flag the check boxes of “General Modification, Valuation Modif, Valuation Class” and save the screen and click on “Accounts” Button. It will display the following screen:


- 508 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen double click on “PRD – Cost (Price) Differences”


In the above screen don’t flag any of the check boxes just Save the screen and click on “Accounts” Button. It will display the following screen:

- 509 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of Finished good Material PATH: LogisticsÆ Materials ManagementÆ Material MasterÆ MaterialÆ Create (General)Æ MM01 – Immediately. Transaction Code: MM01 With the above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the above screen select “Industry Sector, Material type” Now click on Select View(S), so it will display the following screen:

- 510 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen select the views as I shown click on “Default Values” and click on enter button or continue key it will display the following screen:

- 511 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter the values as I shown click on “Default Values” and click on enter button or continue key it will display the following screen:

- 512 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above screen under “Basic Data 1” tab enter required values and click on enter button so it will display next tab as below:

In the above screen under “Sales: sales org.1” tab maintain other values and click on “Conditions” button so it will display the following screen:

- 513 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen maintain conditions like “1- Liable for tax, 2 – Exemption from Tax”, click on Main Data button so will display main screen now click enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above screen under “Sales: General/Plant” tab enter required values and click on enter button so it will display next tab as below:

- 514 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen under “MRP 1” tab enter required values and click on enter button so it will display next tab as below:

In the above screen under “Forecasting” tab enter required values and click on enter button so it will display next tab as below:

- 515 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen under “Work scheduling” tab enter required values and click on enter button so it will display next tab as below:

In the above screen under “Accounting 1” tab enter required values and click on enter button so it will display next tab as below:

- 516 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen under “Costing 1” tab enter required values and click on save button to save the Material it will give you following message with material number:

In the above message we can find material number that will be used in further process. Back to easy access screen.

- 517 -


Version ECC 6.0 Maintain Condition Records PATH: LogisticsÆSales and DistributionÆMaster DataÆConditionsÆSelect Using Condition TypeÆVK11 – Create Transaction Code: VK11 By the above transaction it will display the following screen:

In the a above screen enter condition type “PR00 - price” and pres enter button. It will display the following screen:

In the above window select radio button “Material with Release Status” and pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

Enter the above parameters and save the screen. Click on back button once so it will display the following screen:

- 518 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter condition type “K004 – Material Discount” Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:


In the above screen enter condition type “1005 –1105 Excise Duty Payable” Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 519 -


Version ECC 6.0 In the above window select radio button “Country/Plant Reqion/Region/TaxcI1cust/TaxcI.Mat” and click enter button so it will display the following screen:


In the above screen enter condition type “1006 – Cess Payable” Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

In the above window select radio button “Country/Plant Reqion/Region/TaxcI1cust/TaxcI.Mat” and click enter button so it will display the following screen:

- 520 -


Version ECC 6.0


In the above screen enter condition type “1007 – VAT Payable” Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:


- 521 -


Version ECC 6.0


In the above screen enter condition type “1008 – CST Payable” Pres enter button so it will display the following screen:


- 522 -


Version ECC 6.0 Enter the above parameters and back to Easy access screen.

- 523 -


Version ECC 6.0 Creation of Sales Order PATH: LogisticsÆ Sales and DistributionÆ SalesÆ OrderÆ VA01 - Create Transaction Code: VA01

In the above screen enter those parameters and click enter button it will display the following screen:

Select this line and double click on the same

In the above screen enter customer number to “Sold-to-Party” mateirla number to “Material” field and quantity to “Order Quantity” field pres enter button. Now select the line and double click on the same line it will display the following screen:

- 524 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen you can view the price, discount, taxes details of the order. Now save the order so it will display the following message:

In the above message it shoes order number as “12088” make a note of that. Back easy access screen. Goods Receipt posting (Entry of Stock Balances) PATH: LogisticsÆ Materials ManagementÆ Inventory ManagementÆ Goods MovementÆ Goods ReceiptÆ MB1C – Other. Transaction Code: MB1C

In the above screen enter “Movement type, Plant, Storage Location” and pres enter button so it will take you to another screen as below:

- 525 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen enter material number and quantity of goods. Pres enter button and save the activity. So the finished good will update. Back to easy access screen.

Outbound Delivery PATH: LogisticsÆSales and DistributionÆShipping and TransportationÆOutbound DeliveryÆCreateÆSingle DocumentÆVL01N - With Reference to Sales Order Transaction Code: VL01N

In the above screen enter: Shipping point Selection date (NOTE: this date should be at least one week future date) Order (The Order number which deliver when you raised sales order in above step) After enter the above parameters pres enter button, so it will display the followings screen:

- 526 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen just click on Picking tab, the below screen will display:

In the above screen under “Picking” tab enter Picked Qty(Picking quantity) Now click on “Post Goods Issue”

When you click on “Post Goods Issue” it will automatically post and issue above screen. Back to easy access screen. Billing Document PATH: LogisticsÆSales and DistributionÆBillingÆBilling DocumentÆVF01 – Create Transaction Code: VF01

- 527 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen give date, document no which you got from above step (goods issue) Click on execute button or pres enter button so it will display the following screen:

Just save the above document It will post to respective GL’s Customer Report PATH: AccountingÆFinancial AccountingÆAccounts ReceivableÆAccountÆFBL5N - Display/Change Line Items Transaction Code: FBL5N / FS10N By above transaction it will display the following screen:

- 528 -


Version ECC 6.0

In the above screen select the parameters and executive the activity it will display the following screen:

In above screen you can view the open items with Document Type “RV” which are posted with SD integration. To clear those open items use Transaction Code F-28

- 529 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 530 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 531 -


Version ECC 6.0 1. What is difference between company and company code? 2. What are all fields appear in configuration of company code? 3. What is Business area? Do we assign Business Area to C.Code? 4. What is Consolidation Business Area? 5. What are the Organisational Elements that are Assign to C.Code? 6. What if Fiscal year Variant? 7. What are the types of Fiscal year Variant? 8. What are Year Dependent and Year Independent? 9. What is difference between Configuration and Customisation? 10. What is C.Code to Productive? 11. What is Posting Periods? 12. What is Document Number Ranges? 13. What is Document Type? 14. What is Tolerance? 15. What is Posting Key? 16. What is Field Status? 17. In how many levels Field Status can be maintain in GL? 18. What is Base Line Date? 19. What are Priority levels of Fields Status? 20. What is Chart of Accounts? 21. How many Chart of Accounts we can assign to C.Code? 22. What is Recurring Entries? 23. What are types of Chart of Accounts? 24. What is the use of Group Chart of Account? 25. What information dose Chart of Accounts contain? 26. What are all fields appear in configuration of Chart of Accounts? 27. What are all the Screens available in FS00? 28. What all the fields appear in FS00 screen? And what is the peruse of each? 29. How many Currencies we can maintain in one C.Code and what are they? 30. What Direct Quotation and Indirect Quotation in Currencies? 31. What are the steps for Balance Interest Calculation? 32. What Time-Dependent Terms in Interest Calculation? 33. When you have multiple Reference Interest Rates what is basic Condition? 34. What is Item Interest Calculation?

- 532 -


Version ECC 6.0 35. What is House Bank? 36. What is Addition ledger? How do we maintain that? 37. What is Validation? Explain steps with example? 38. What is Subscription? Explain steps with example? 39. How many maximum line items can you post in one transaction? 40. What are the month end activities?

41. What T.Code for APP Configuration. 42. Explain all APP steps. 43. What is NEXT DATE in APP? How it helps in APP? 44. What are the configurations to avoid a certain region vendors in APP program? 45. What are the configurations to pay vendor through certain bank (Referred by Vendor)? 46. What are the steps followed to run APP? 47. How can we find whether all vendors all selected are not? 48. Explain Tax on Sales and Purchase? 49. Explain configuration steps to calculate tax include of Tax on Sales and Purchase? 50. Explain Payment terms? 51. Explain Item Interest Calculation. 52. What is aging enlaces? 53. What are the month end activities? 54. What is Dunning? 55. What are the Configuration steps for Dunning? 56. How many levels we can maintain in Dunning? 57. What is credit management? 58. Bad Debit configuration? 59. What is Payment Terms? How do you maintain that? 60. What is the purpose of W/tax type Step? 61. How to configure the Education cess in w/tax? 62. What Check Deposit Process? 63. What are all the steps to prepare BRS? 64. What are the month end activities?

- 533 -


Version ECC 6.0 65. Complete steps in FI and MM integration? 66. What are all the GL a/c’s that will affect in complete FI and MM integration flow? 67. What are all the General Entry in each step of FI and MM integration? 68. Where do we maintain periods in MM? 69. Where do we assign GL a/c’s for MM? What is T.Code and what are the A/C Determination points? (For ex., WRX, BSX……) 70. What are the tolerance limits for MM? 71. Complete steps in FI and SD Integration? 72. What are all the GL a/c’s that will affect in complete FI and SD integration flow? 73. What are all the General Entry in each step of FI and SD integration?

- 534 -


Version ECC 6.0 SAF FI Technical Interview Questions 1. Tell me about FI Organizational structure? Ans: Client | Operating Concern | Controlling area1 Controlling Area 2 | Co. Code 1 Co. Code 2 | Bus area 1 Bus area2 Bus Area3 Bus Area 4 2. How many Normal and Special periods will be there in fiscal year, why do u use special periods? Ans: 12 Normal posting period and 4 special periods are in the fiscal year which can be used for posting tax and audit adjustments to a closed fiscal year. 3. Where do you open and close periods? Ans: PPV is used to open and close the periods based on a/c types considering GL Accounts. Tr. Code. OB52. 4. What do you enter in Company code Global settings? Ans: • • • • • • •

4 digit Alphanumeric key. Name of the company City Country Currency Language Address

5. What is document type, and what does it control? Examples. Ans: Document type is nothing vouchers containing line items. Several business transactions can be identified within a particular document type. It controls the document number ranges. It controls the Header part of document IT controls the line item level of the document Helps filing of physical document 6. What is posting key and what does it control? Ans: These are special classification keys. Two character numerical key it controls the entry of line items. Posting key determines Account type, Debit/credit posting, Field status of transaction. 7. What is field status group, what does it control? Ans: FSG is mandatory field in ! GL Creation. You use this field to define which fields are displayed when you post business transactions to a G/L account. A field may have one of the following statuses.

- 535 -


Version ECC 6.0 -

Suppressed Display Optional Required

8. What is chart of account and how many charts of accounts can be assigned to a company? Ans: Chart of account is a list of all G/L accounts used by one or several company codes. For each G/L account, the chart of accounts contains the account number, account name, and the information that controls how an account functions and how a G/L account is created in a Company code. You have to assign a chart of accounts to each company code. This chart of accounts is the Operating chart of accounts and is used for the daily postings in this company code. You have the following options when using multiple company codes. You can use the same chart of accounts for all company codes If the company codes all have the same requirements for the chart of accounts set up, assign all of the individual company codes to the same chart of accounts. This could be the case if all company codes are in the same country. In addition to the operating chart of accounts, you can use two additional charts of accounts If the individual company codes need different charts of accounts, you can assign up to two charts of accounts in addition to the operating chart of accounts. This could be the case if company codes lie in multiple countries. The use of different charts of accounts has no effect on the balance sheet and profit and loss statement. When creating the balance sheet or the profit and loss statement, you can choose whether to balance the co! mpany codes which use different charts of accounts together or separately. 9. What does definition of a chart of account contains? Ans: chart of account key Name Maintenance language Length of the GL Account Number Controlling Integration Group chart of accounts (Consolidation) Block Indicator 10. Can one COA be assigned to several companies? Ans: yes. One COA can be assigned to several companies. 11) What is account group and what does it control? Ans: Account group determines which fields you can configure on the G/L master record. It is necessary to have at least two one for B/S and another one for P&L a/c. It controls the Number ranges of GL A/C. The status of fields of the master record of GL belongs to company code area. 12) What is reconciliation account; can you directly enter documents in that a/c? Ans: When you p! ost items to a subsidiary ledger, the system automatically posts the same data to the general ledger. Each subsidiary ledger has one or more reconciliation accounts in the general ledger.We can't use reconciliation account for direct postings.

- 536 -


Version ECC 6.0 13) How do you control field status of GL master records and from where do you control! Ans: Field status variant is maintained all FSGs. 14) What are the segments of GL master record? Ans: • • • • • • • • • • • •

COA Segment A/C group Nature of account Short text GL a/c long text Trading partner Group Account Number Company code segment Account currency Tax Reconciliation a/c for a/c type OIM,LID,FSG.

15) What does Field status group assigned to a GL master record controls? Ans: It controls the account assignments that are made to the account. Specifically the field status group controls whether postings to cost centers, internal orders, profitability segments and so on are required, not allowed (suppressed), or optional. 16) What is Country and operational chart of account? Why do you use group chart of account? Ans: Operational chart of account – Day to day activities It is mandatory. Country COA – It's used for legal specific requirement of each country. It's additional and optional. Group COA used for consolidation of Company codes. This is for group consolidation purpose. 17) What are all the segments in a Customer/Vendor master record? Ans: Segments in Customer Segments in Vendor - General Data segment General data segment - Company code segment Company code segment - Sales area segment Purchasing organization Segment 18) What is open line item management? What do you mean by clearing open line items? Ans: Open item management is further reconciliation function. OIM allows you to display the open and cleared items and amounts in an account. OIM should be used if an offsetting entry is made for every line item posted in the account. The a/c is reconciled and cleared against another account. Ex. Salary clearing account and GR/IR Clearing account. 19) What is residual payment and part payment?

- 537 -


Version ECC 6.0 Ans: Residual payment it clears original invoice with incoming amount and create new line item for remaining outstanding amount. Partial payment it leaves the original invoice amount and creates new line item for incoming amount. 20) What is internal and external number ranges? Ans: Internal Number Ranges: Doc. No will be provided by the system automatically! in serial order allotting the next available progressive number. The number must be in numerical. External Number ranges: Doc. No will be given manually by the end user. System will not lock no automatically in this case. User can pick the number randomly. Number may be an alpha numeric. 21.Whether any FI document will be created during PO(Purchase order)? If pl mention the entry also? Ans: There is no document that is created in FI side during PO. But in controlling there can be a commitment posting to a Cost Center. The offsetting entry is posted at the time of GR.

22. What factors differentiates from one dunning level and other dunning level. Ans: The most important thing that differentiates the dunning levels are the dunning texts. The dunning text defines the urgency of the dunning notice. The other things can be the dunning charges, minimum & maximum amounts etc. 23. APP There will be many banks in a house bank. If the payment should be maid from particular bank GL account. Where it is configured? Ans: There can be several accounts in the same house bank. We should assign the GL accounts exclusively at the time of creating the Bank master data and the bank accounts. Accordingly we can do the bank determination in FBZP for the individual banks and the corresponding sub accounts. Transaction code for Defining bank : FI12. 24.What are various types of servers in SAP R/3? Ans: The Typical SAP landscape looks something like figure 1.4 below:

25.can anybody explain me FI-MM integartion.pl explain in detail i. Movement types: Classification key indicating the type of material movement (for example, goods receipt, goods issue, physical stock transfer). The movement type enables the system to find predefined posting rules determining how the accounts of the financial accounting system (stock and consumption accounts) are to be posted and how the stock fields in the material master record are to be updated. ii. Valuation class Assignment of a material to a group of G/L accounts Along with other factors, the valuation class determines the G/L accounts that are updated as a result of a valuation-relevant transaction or event, such as a goods movement. The valuation class makes it possible to:

- 538 -


Version ECC 6.0 - Post the stock values of materials of the same material type to different G/L accounts - Post the stock values of materials of different material types to the same G/L account iii. Transaction/Event Key Key allowing the user to differentiate between the various transactions and events (such as physical inventory transactions and goods movements) that occur within the field of inventory management. The transaction/event type controls the filing/storage of documents and the assignment of document numbers. iv. Material Type Groups together materials with the same basic attributes, for example, raw materials, semi finished products, or finished products. When creating a material master record, you must assign the material to a material type. The material type you choose determines: - Whether the material is intended for a specific purpose, for example, as a configurable material or process material - Whether the material number can be assigned internally or externally - The number range from which the material number is drawn - Which screens appear and in what sequence - Which user department data you may enter - What procurement type the material has; that is, whether it is manufactured in-house or procured externally, or both Together with the plant, the material type determines the material's inventory management requirement, that is: - Whether changes in quantity are updated in the material master record - Whether changes in value are also updated in the stock accounts in financial accounting 26.Maximum no. of dunning levels are created? Ans: 9 levels maximum. 27.In how many ways APP is configured? Tr Code: FBZP 28.What is diff between AAM, Recurring entries, Sample document ? Account Assignment Model: A reference for document entry that provides default values for posting business transactions. An account assignment model can contain any number of G/L account items and can be changed or supplemented at any time. In contrast to sample documents, the G/L account items for account assignment models may be incomplete.

- 539 -


Version ECC 6.0 Recurring Entries: A periodically recurring posting made by the recurring entry program on the basis of recurring entry original documents. The procedure is comparable with a standing order by which banks are authorized to debit rent payments, payment contributions or loan repayments. Sample Documents: Special type of reference document. Data from this document is used to create default entries on the accounting document entry screen. Unlike an accounting document, a sample document does not update transaction figures but merely serves as a data source for an accounting document. 29. Where to assign activity type in cost centers? OR how to link cost centers & activity types? There is no direct assignment. You plan the output for a cost center first in kp26. Then you've to plan the value of that cost center which you budget for a period in kp06. Planned Activity expenditure / Planned Actvty qty gives yoa planned act rate which you can use to valuate your activity confirmations in mfg ordrs. You can also define your own prices,but you have to run the price revaluation if you want to revaluate your actual activity prices. 30. For stat. key figure what is the significance of sender & receiver cost elements & cost centers? Stat key fig are not real account assignments. In simple traditional terms it is the base to allocate or define proportions with which the cost is allocated. SKFs are used to calculate the debit on a receiver object. These values can be used for assessing common costs which are used by all the other cost centers. How SKF works .. Kindly give me T Codes Also. You create & plan SKF. Create using KK01 & PLAN the parameters of SKF in KP46

- 540 -


Version ECC 6.0 31: What is Software Life Cycle? Ans: it is nothing but Road Map - five phases like, Project Preparation, Blue print, Realisation, Final preparation and Go-livesupport. 32: In GL master we have a option "Balance in local currency" and "Account currency".What does it mean? Ans: Account currency is that the GL account in which currency do you want to maintain. if you decided that you want maintain in company code currency, you can post any currency in that account. If not, you want to maintain separate currency for that GL then exchange rate difference will come because the conversion rate. Balance in local currency - some GL account can't be maintain on open item basis and can't in foreign currency like clearing account and discount account etc., in such case you can assign this indicator to show the balance in local currency.

33. In movement type(MM), what is value & quantity string I know it updates values and quantities in GL with mix of valuvation class, transaction key modifier and GL A/c. But how does it work when doing a mvt type? Ans: Basically, the system does not know which GL has to be updated with what. here, we are giving a direction to the system to update the data. What you said is correct, the system will update the value and qty in the material master. You would have seen some more fields also, like Movement indicator, consumption, value string and transaction event key etc., While creating a PO, the system will take the Movement type as a base, with MT, it will identify the MI(movement indicator - used to define whether it is goods movement for production order, purchase order, delivery note etc), and it will identify the consumption,( like it is assets, or consumption or sales order) and it will identify the value string ( it is must to assigned to movement type, through allocation of value string to movement type, system will automatically identify the GL ) and it will post the entry (dr/cr)in the GL based on the transaction and event key figure which is used to determine the debit and credit entry of a GL 35. About evolution in the world of business, we can affirmate that (Please choose the correct sentence): a) [ ] The internet revolution could turn available to companies the use of ERP functionality. b) [ ] The next generation of Â"new dimensionÂ" products appeared taking functionality out of the company, to bring value through extending the Internet Revolution. c) [ ] The internet has driven to a collaborative environment where value is created through collaboration within business comunities. d) [ ] In the first the companies were looking at Cost reduction and efficiency through integration of business comunities. 36. About the definition of ERP and e-business functionalities, we can say that (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct): a) [ ] ERP offers enterprise centric functionality (general ledger, payroll, order entry) to integrate core, internal processes. b) [ ] ERP is mySAP Financials and mySAP HR.

- 541 -


Version ECC 6.0 c) [ ] ERP is SAP R/3, while e-business is mySAP.com. d) [ ] About Business Model, ERP can be considered as enterprise centric and e-business, as extended and collaborative. e) [ ] About Architecture, ERP can be considered as an integrated system and e-business, as an integrated system and an open integration platform. f) [ ] About Processes, ERP can have them integrated, core within enterprises and collaborative, beyond company boundaries. 37. What is a SAP Business Object (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] It is all the transaction data generated via transactions. b) [ ] It is the instancied class of the Class Builder. c) [ ] It is composed of tables that are related in a business context, including the related appplication programs and it is maintained in the Class Repository. d) [ ] It is the representation of a central business object in the real world, such as an employee, sales order, purchase requisition, invoice and so on. e) [ ] It is a sequence of dialog steps that are consistent in a business context and that belong together logically. 38. About BAPI (Business Application Programming Interface), what is true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] It is a well-defined interface providing access to processes and data of business application systems. b) [ ] BAPIs offer a stable, standardized interface for integrating third-party applications and components in the Business Framework. c) [ ] A BAPI is assigned to one and only one business object. d) [ ] In the R/3 Enterprise version (4.7) we can use BAPI to create an internal order inside a customized ABAP program. e) [ ] A business object in the Business Object Repository (BOR) can have many methods from which one or several are implemented as BAPIs. 39. What can we say about ALE (Application Link Enabling, Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] Business processes cannot be distributed using ALE. b) [ ] The ALE concept is related to an enterprise structure with areas that have central tasks and areas with tasks that are decentralized. c) [ ] The applications are integrated via a central database. d) [ ] The applications are integrated via the message exchange. e) [ ] The ALE concept supports the implementation and operation of distributed SAP applications. 40. A company code is: a) [ ] an independent accounting entity (the smallest organization element for which a complete selfcontained set of accounts can be drawn up). b) [ ] an organizational unit in an enterprise that represents a closed system used for cost accounting purposes. c) [ ] an organizational unit that provides an additional evaluation level for the purpose of segment reporting, for example. d) [ ] a dependent accounting entity, according to Fiscal Year. e) [ ] the highest level in the R/3 system hierarchy.

- 542 -


Version ECC 6.0 41. Consider the following sentences: 41.1. The variant principle is a three-step method used in R/3 to assign special properties to one or more R/3 objects. 41.2. One of the disadvantages to use variants is that it can't deal with the maintenance of properties, which are common among several business objects. 41.3. For using the variant principle, you must define the variant, populate it with values and assign it to the R/3 objects. 41.4. This principle is used for Fiscal Years, Posting Periods and so on. Which of them is false? a) [ ] 41.1 and 41.2. b) [ ] 41.1 and 41.3. c) [ ] 41.1. d) [ ] 41.2. e) [ ] 41.3. 42. Consider the following sentences: 42.1. A fiscal year has to be defined by means of separating business transactions into different periods. 42.2. Special periods are used for postings, which are related to the process of the year-end closing. In total, 16 special periods can be used. 42.3. The Fiscal Year variant only defines the amount of periods and their start and finish dates. 42.4. The Fiscal Year is defined as a variant, which is assigned to the chart of accounts. Which of them are true? a) [ ] 42.1 and 42.2. b) [ ] 42.1 and 42.3. c) [ ] 42.2 and 42.3. d) [ ] 42.2 and 42.4. e) [ ] 42.3 and 42.4. 43. What is an independent fiscal year variant (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] It is a variant which the postings periods are only equal to the months of the year. b) [ ] It is a variant which you can define different number of periods, according to the year. c) [ ] It is a variant which each own fiscal year uses the same number of periods, and the postings periods always start and end at the same day of the year. d) [ ] It is a variant which allows the use of different number of posting periods. e) [ ] It is a variant not normally used because of its particularity. 44. Consider the following statements about currencies concepts: 44.1. The currency code identifies each currency that will be used into R/3 system. 44.2. You have to define all the world Â's currency into R/3 system 44.3. Exchange rate types distinguishes the exchange rates to be considered for various purposes, such as valuation, translation, conversion, planning, etc. Which of them is true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] 44.1. b) [ ] 44.2. c) [ ] 44.3. d) [ ] none of them.

- 543 -


Version ECC 6.0 e) [ ] all of them.

- 544 -


Version ECC 6.0 45. Consider the following sentences: 45.1. A base currency can be assigned to an exchange rate type. 45.2. To deal with exchange rate spreads, two very efficient combinations of the exchange rate tools are using a base currency for the average rate (M) and using the exchange rate spreads to calculate the buying and selling rates (B and G). 45.3. A base currency can be used for an average, a buying or a selling rate. 45.4. The relations between currencies have to be maintained per exchange rate type and currency pair in the translation factors. Which of these combinations is true? a) [ ] 45.1, 45.3 and 45.4. b) [ ] 45.1, 45.2 and 45.4. c) [ ] 45.2, 45.3 and 45.4. d) [ ] 45.1, 45.2 and 45.3. e) [ ] 45.1, 45.2, 45.3 and45.4. 46. Consider the following sentences about the direct quotation: 46.1. It is also known as price notation. 46.2. The currency value is expressed in units of the foreign currency per unit of local currency. 46.3. For direct quotation, the prefix to indicate the rate is Â"/Â". What is the correct option? a) [ ] 46.1. b) [ ] 46.2. c) [ ] 46.3. d) [ ] none of them. e) [ ] all of them. 47. Consider the following sentences about the indirect quotation: 47.1. It is also known as volume notation. 47.2. The currency value is expressed in the local currency per unit of foreign currency. 47.3. For indirect quotation, there is no prefix to difference between direct quotation. What is the correct option? a) [ ] all of them. b) [ ] none of them. c) [ ] 47.3. d) [ ] 47.2. e) [ ] 47.1. 48. What of these alternatives are considered master data (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] Chart of Accounts. b) [ ] G/L Accounts. c) [ ] Vendor. d) [ ] Customer. e) [ ] Asset.

- 545 -


Version ECC 6.0 49. What can we define into the chart of accounts customizing transaction (OB13 transaction, Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] Description. b) [ ] Maintenance language. c) [ ] Length of the company code. d) [ ] Length of the G/L account number. e) [ ] Blocking / unblocking chart of accounts.

50. Consider the following sentences about the chart of accounts segment: 50.1. It contains the Company Code, Account number and the field status group. 50.2. Whenever you need to enter information for a company code for an account number, you have to type again the information related to chart of accounts segment. 50.3. Texts can be displayed using the program Â"Account assignment manualÂ"(RFSKTH00). 50.4. Key words facilitate the search for account numbers. Which of these combinations are false (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] 50.1. b) [ ] 50.2. c) [ ] 50.3. d) [ ] 50.4. e) [ ] none of them. 51. True or false? 51.1. Every company code that needs to use an account from the assigned chart of accounts has to create its own company code segment. a) [ ] True b) [ ] False 51.2. For P+L statement accounts, the balance is carried forward to the same account. a) [ ] True b) [ ] False 51.3. In the chart of accounts segment, it is necessary to indicate whether the account will be a balance sheet or a profit+loss statement account. a) [ ] True b) [ ] False 51.4. Number intervals for G/L account master records can overlap. a) [ ] True b) [ ] False 51.5. It is not possible to influence the appearance of an account's master data.

- 546 -


Version ECC 6.0 a) [ ] True b) [ ] False 52. Consider the following sentences about field status: 52.1. Fields which are _____________ can be ____________. 52.2. Fields which have an entry that ________________ can be set to _________ only (even in change mode). Which of the options below matches the blank spaces of those sentences? a) [ ] used/suppressed for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2. b) [ ] not used/suppressed for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2. c) [ ] not used/optional for 18.1; should not be changed/suppressed for 18.2. d) [ ] not used/suppressed for 18.1; should not be changed /display for 18.2. e) [ ] used/optional for 18.1; must be changed/display for 18.2.

53. Consider the following sentences about field status: 53.1. Fields which _____________ can be made ____________. 53.2. Fields that can be entered, but are not required, can be set to _________ entry. Which of the options below matches the blank spaces of those sentences? a) [ ] must not have an entry/optional for 53.1; suppresed for 53.2. b) [ ] must have an entry/supressed for 53.1; suppresed for 53.2. c) [ ] must have an entry/optional for 53.1; optional for 53.2. d) [ ] must have an entry/required for 53.1; optional for 53.2. e) [ ] must not have an entry/required for 53.1; optional for 53.2. 54. Consider the following sentences: 54.1. Reconciliation accounts are general ledger accounts assigned to the business partner master records to record all transactions in the sub-ledger. 54.2. For accounts without line item display, the most important data from the posted line items is stored in a special index table. 54.3. The account currency must be in the local currency. 54.4. Items in accounts with open item management means the G/L accounts should have a offsetting posting for a given business transaction. Which of these are true (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] 54.1 and 54.3. b) [ ] 54.2 and 54.4. c) [ ] 54.1 and 54.2. d) [ ] 54.2 and 54.3. e) [ ] 54.1 and 54.4.

- 547 -


Version ECC 6.0

Answers: 34. C 35. A, C, D, E. 36. D 37. A, B, C, D, E. 38. B, D, E. 39. A Item Â"BÂ" is the definition of controlling area. Item Â"CÂ" is the definition of business area. Item Â"DÂ" is not any definition. Item Â"EÂ" is the definition of client. 40. D In fact, the main advantage of using variants is that it is easier to maintain properties, which are common among several business objects. 41. B 42. C 43. A, C. Most of the world's currencies are already defined into R/3 system. 44. B Be careful: A base currency can only be used for an average rate, not for a selling or a buying rate. 45. A 46. E 47. B, C, D, E. A chart of accounts is a variant, which contains the structure and the basic information about general ledger accounts. 48. A, B, D, E. 49. A, B. 50. True or false:

- 548 -


Version ECC 6.0 51.1. True. 51.2. False. For P+L statement accounts the balance is carried forward to a retained earnings account and the P+L statement account is set to zero. 51.3. True. 51.4. True. 51.5. False. It is possible to influence the appearance of an account's master data using the field status. 52. D 53. D 54. E 55. Since the line item display takes up additional system resources, you should only use it if there is no other way of looking at the line items. So, you should not activate the line item display for the following accounts (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct): a) [ ] P+L Statement. b) [ ] Reconciliation. c) [ ] Revenue. d) [ ] Material Stock. e) [ ] Tax.

Questions 56. Consider the following statements: 56.1. Accounts with open item management must have line item display activated. 56.2. You can activate or deactivate open item management everytime, even if the account hasnÂ't a zero balance. 56.3. You can select both local and foreign currencies as account currency. 56.4. If the account is the local currency, the account can only be posted to this currency. 56.5. When using the Â"Only Balances in Local CurrencyÂ" indicator in the master data record, transaction figures are only managed for amounts translated into local currency. Which of the above statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] 56.1. b) [ ] 56.2. c) [ ] 56.3. d) [ ] 56.4. e) [ ] 56.5. 57. True or false?

- 549 -


Version ECC 6.0 57.1. The "Only Balances in Local Currency" indicator must not be set in reconciliation accounts for customers or vendors. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 57.2. The "Only Balances in Local Currency" indicator is usually set in balance sheet accounts that are not managed in foreign currencies and not managed on an open item basis. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 57.3. Accounts with a foreign currency as an account currency can be posted to any currency. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 57.4. You can use a group chart of accounts for internal purposes. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 57.5. The usage of a financial statement version for the group chart of accounts is optional. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 58. What is the disadvantage of using the group chart of accounts (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] Because changes to existing G/L Accounts are effective as soon as they have been saved and could have extensive consequences. b) [ ] Because accounts with the account currency as local currency can only be posted to this local currency. c) [ ] Because the company codes use different operational chart of accounts, you cannot carry out cross-company code controlling. d) [ ] Because the group chart of accounts must be assigned to each operational chart of accounts. e) [ ] Because you must enter the group account number in the chart of acounts segment of the operational account. 59. Consider the following statements: 59.1. You cannot use the country chart of accounts if you desire to use the cross-company code controlling. 59.2. The disadvantage of using country chart of accounts is the accounting clerks who may be familiar with the country chart of accounts first have to get used to using the operational chart of accounts. 59.3. Reconciliation accounts are updated on a daily basis. Which of them are false (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] 59.1 and 59.2. b) [ ] 59.1 and 59.3. c) [ ] 59.2 and 59.3. d) [ ] all of them. e) [ ] none of them. 60. Which are the segments of the SD view of the customer account master data (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?

- 550 -


Version ECC 6.0 a) [ ] Client. b) [ ] Company Code. c) [ ] Controlling Area. d) [ ] Sales Area. e) [ ] Purchasing Organization.

61. Which are the segments of the MM view of the customer account master data (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] Client. b) [ ] Company Code. c) [ ] Controlling Area. d) [ ] Sales Area. e) [ ] Purchasing Organization.

62. What is the segment that makes complete both customer and vendor accounts (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] Client. b) [ ] Company Code. c) [ ] Controlling Area. d) [ ] Sales Area. e) [ ] Purchasing Organization. 63. What characteristics are configured as standard for every customer/vendor account (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] Line Item Display. b) [ ] Company Code. c) [ ] Currency. d) [ ] Open Item Management. e) [ ] Purchasing Organization. 64. Consider the following statements: 64.1. Number ranges for customer/vendor accounts can overlap. 64.2. An one-time account is a special customer/vendor master record which a company rarely do business. 64.3. The account group is used to control the fields displayed in the master record. 64.4. If you enter an alternative payer, the amount to clear the open items due in the account is paid by the alternative payer. 64.5. One number range can only be assigned to one account group. Which of the above statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] 64.1. b) [ ] 64.2. c) [ ] 64.3. d) [ ] 64.4.

- 551 -


Version ECC 6.0 e) [ ] 64.5. 65. True or false? 65.1. For every bank that is used in the system (for example, as a house bank or as a customer/vendor bank) you have to create a bank master record. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 65.2. Banks that are used by your company are defined as house banks. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 65.3. You cannot create bank master data when entering bank information in the customer or vendor master record. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 65.4. Bank Account and G/L Account are the same master data object. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 65.5. Customers that use the lockbox function can create a batch input session that automatically updates customer banking information in the master record. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 66. Consider the following statements: 66.1. The system can assign the document numbers or the user can assign the number during document entry. 66.1. A business transaction creates only one document. 66.3. Document types are defined at company code level. 66.4. Number ranges for document numbers and account types defined for postings are defined by the document types. 66.5. Document types also define whether invoices are posted with the net procedure. Choose the correct option: a) [ ] 66.1, 66.4 and 66.5 are correct. b) [ ] 66.2, 66.4 and 66.5 are correct. c) [ ] 66.3, 66.4 and 66.5 are correct. d) [ ] 66.1, 66.3 and 66.4 are correct. e) [ ] 66.1, 66.2 and 66.5 are correct. 67. What do the posting keys specify (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] Whether the line item is connected to a payment transaction or not. b) [ ] Whether the posting is sales-relevant and the sales figure of the account is to be updated by the transaction, for example, by the posting of a customer invoice. c) [ ] Whether the line items contain "credit" or "debit" values. d) [ ] Whether the line items are valid for a business transaction. e) [ ] Whether the accounts are allowed for posting.

- 552 -


Version ECC 6.0 68. Consider the following statements: 68.1. A company code must be assigned to a posting period variant to have the control for posting periods. 68.2.`+' symbol represents all account types in the posting period customizing screen. 68.3. The account interval in the posting period customizing screen can be both G/L and subledger accounts. 68.4. The maximum amounts are defined per company code in "tolerance groups". 68.5. It is not possible to assign tolerance groups to user logon ID's. Choose the correct option: a) [ ] 68.1, 68.4 and 68.5 are correct. b) [ ] 68.2, 68.4 and 68.5 are correct. c) [ ] 68.3, 68.4 and 68.5 are correct. d) [ ] 68.1, 68.2 and 68.4 are correct. e) [ ] 14.1, 68.2 and 68.5 are correct. 69. What fields of a FI Document Header section can be changed after a document has already been posted (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] Fiscal Year. b) [ ] Reference Number. c) [ ] Text fields. d) [ ] Header text. e) [ ] Posting date. 70. About the change control, what conditions below are applicable (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? 70.1. The posting period is already closed. 70.2. The line item is not yet cleared. 70.3. The document is a credit memo for an invoice. 70.4. The document is not a credit memo from a down payment. 70.5. The line item is either a debit in a customer account or a credit in a vendor account. a) [ ] 70.1. b) [ ] 70.2. c) [ ] 70.3. d) [ ] 70.4. e) [ ] 70.5. 71. What are the prerequisites to enable negative postings (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)? a) [ ] You have to define reversal reasons for negative reversal. b) [ ] You have to ensure company code permits negative postings. c) [ ] You have to define the document type that explicitly allows negative postings. d) [ ] You have to use cleared items. e) [ ] You have to reset cleared items.

- 553 -


Version ECC 6.0 72. What is the purpose of the terms of payment (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] Calculate a cash discount and invoice due date. b) [ ] Calculate the tax amounts. c) [ ] Enable the cross-company code transactions. d) [ ] Define the baseline date. e) [ ] Calculate only the required conditions for SD invoices. 73. Consider the following statements: 73.1. Terms of payments are copied from invoice to credit memos when they are linked to. 73.2. Inserting a Â"VÂ" in the invoice reference field during document entry means the terms of payment are activated in the non-invoice-related credit memos. 73.3. The account type field in terms of payment basic data screen should be defined separately, to prevent any done change in the term of payment. 73.4. The system cannot define the splitment of an installment payment, at least you define it in the terms of payment. 73.5. The day limits define the dates of the cash discount periods. Which of the statements above is false (Please choose the correct sentence)? a) [ ] 73.1. b) [ ] 73.2. c) [ ] 73.3. d) [ ] 73.4. e) [ ] 73.5. 74. True or false? 74.1. SAP supports tax on sales and purchases, US sales tax, additional taxes and withholding tax as tax systems for different countries. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 74.2. Only national level of taxation is allowed in the R/3 system. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 74.3. A tax calculation procedure is assigned to every company code for carrying out tax calculations. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 74.4.A jurisdiction code is a combination of the codes of tax authorities that tax movements of goods and use their own tax rates. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False. 74.5. If you desire to post manual tax postings, you have to flag the "Post Automatically Only" field of the account master record. a) [ ] True. b) [ ] False.

- 554 -


Version ECC 6.0

Answers: 55. B, C, D, E. 56. A, C, E. 57. True or false: 57.1. True. 57.2. True. 57.3. False. Accounts with a foreign currency as an account currency can only be posted to in this foreign currency. 57.4. True. 57.5. False. You must use a financial statement version for the group chart of accounts. 58. C. Item "a" is related to Collective Processing for G;L Accounts Master Data. Item "b" is not true for the R/3 system concept. If the account currency is the local currency, the account can be posted to in any currency. Item "d" and "e" are some actions to be done for using group chart of accounts, so, they are not the disadvantage. 59. B. In fact, since all company codes use the same operational chart of accounts for postings, you can carry out cross-company code controlling. About Reconciliation accounts, they are updated realtime. 60. A, D. 61. A, E. 62. B. 63. A, D. 64. B, C, D. NOTE: A number range can be assigned to several account groups. 65. True or false? 65.1. True. 65.2. True. 65.3. False. In fact, we can create bank master data when entering bank information in the customer or vendor master record.

- 555 -


Version ECC 6.0 65.4. False. Each bank account is reflected in the SAP System by a combination of house bank ID and account ID. This combination is entered in a G/L account that represents the bank accounting the general ledger. 65.5. True. 66. A. 67. A, B, C, E. 68. D. 69. B, C. 70. B, D, E. 71. A, B, C. 72. A. 73. E. The day limits are used to store several versions of terms of payment under the same terms of payment key. 74. True or false: 74.1. True. 74.2. False. Two types of taxation can be represented in the R/3 system: taxation at national level and taxation at regional/jurisdiction level. 74.3. False. A tax calculation procedure is assigned to every country for carrying out tax calculations. 74.4. True 74.5. False. If you have selected this field, no manual tax postings are allowed. 75. There is "company" field in the Company Code global settings. The R/3 help says that it is being used for consolidation. We can use Group Chart of account to do the same. What is the significance of this field. 76. When we copy the COA, only one Fin Stat Version is being copied. A COA can have many Fin Stat Version. Why copying of COA allows only one Fin St Ver? 77. What are the information that are not copied to new company code when we copy company code? 78. Whether one group chart of account can be assigned to 2 Operational charts. For Eg. INTA and INTB is being used by group of company as OCA. Whether GCA GRP can be assigned to INTA and INTB?

- 556 -


Version ECC 6.0 75A). Company is an organizational unit which is generally used in the legal consolidation to roll up financial statements of several company codes. A company can include one or more company codes. If we are going for Consolidation , we need to enter the 6 character alphanumeric company identifier that relates to this company code. Company Codes within a Company must use the same chart of accounts and fiscal year. And for consolidation purpose we use Group COA wherein we link the Operating COA thru entering the GL account no. of the Group COA in the GL Account of the Operating COA. 76A). A financial statement version corresponds to the chart of accounts and wherein Individual (operational) accounts are assigned to the corresponding FS item on the lowest level of this version. But as for the rollup of Accounts is not possible in all the FSV which can be copied, n rather can update manually n create multiple FSVs if necessary depending on the Financial Statements which are necessary for the Organisation. 77A). All the Organizational units (Global Data) for a company code will b copied to new company code upon using the copy function except for the transactional data. 78A). Yes, Group COA can be assigned i.e., the GL A/c.No. is linked to the GL Accounts of the both Operating COA . That means Group COA consists of Unique set of Accounts which can be linked to Op.COA –1 and Op.COA –2. Ans: Q.No.75. In the SAP system, consolidation functions in financial accounting are based on companies. A company can comprise one or more company codes. for example: Company A have 4 company codes which is existing in different state and / or country. When Company A wants to consolidated the accounts, it will give the common list of accounts which in turn called group chart of accounts. Group chart of account is used to define/ list the GL account uniformly for all company codes. Ans: Q.No.76. In SAP R/3 system, will allow only one financial statement version for single COA which you need to assign the same while copying the COA. T.code OBY7 Ans: Q.No.77. When you want to create FYV, PPV, COA etc for new company code which is as same as existing company code, then you can copy all the information from the source company code to the target company else whatever is required as per the new company code requirement you can only copy the same, rest you can create as per the requirement. for example Fiscal year for new company code may be shortented fiscal year which is differ from the existing company code. In this case, fiscal year for new company code you have to create and assign it to company code. Ans: Q.No.78. Operational chart of accounts is something differ from the Group chart of accounts but Group chart of account can be assigned to Operating chart of account 1 and 2 through GL account no. Operating chart of accounts: The operating chart of accounts contains the GL accounts that you use for posting in your company code during daily activities. Financial accounting and controlling both use this chart of accounts. You have to assign an operating chart of account to a company code. Group chart of accounts: The group chart of accounts contains the GL accounts that are used by the entire corporate group. This allows the company to provide reports for the entire corporate group.

79.How do we know which target cost version we are using?

- 557 -


Version ECC 6.0 To find out which version is used for your Target Cost, try this menu path IMG > Controlling -> Product Cost Controlling -> Cost Object Controlling -> Product Cost by Order -> Period-end Closing -> Variance Calculation -> Define Target Cost Versions (tcode OKV6). 80.How do you change the "Input tax code - Assets without input tax" value for a company in Asset Accounting? Technically, how do you change field MWSKZVA field in table T093C? TIA. You can used transaction 'OBCL'. Via customizing: Asset accounting -> Integration with general ledger -> Assign input tax indicator for non-taxable acquisitions Require GR & IV report 81.Is there any report on GR pending for IV? You could try executing program RFWERE00, without postings. This is the same program which is used for period end closing- regrouping of GR/IR...but for only a report do not create postings. or May be transaction MB5S can help you out. Retained Profit Account 82.After we run the GL balance carry forward, you only manage to know the balance carry forward for the retained profit account but you don't how much is actually post to the particular account. You have try almost all of the standard report but still can't find any report that can show you the figure. The balance carried forward is only a 'calculated' figure and not a 'posted' figure. The break-up of the retained earnings figure is available when you run the balance carried forward report. You can also derive the balance by selecting only the P&L Accounts for the relevant period. The net balance of these accounts should equal the retained earnings account. ACH payment configuration 83.Based on 4.0B. Is it possible to configure the system for ACH payments or do we need to upgrade? You can use RFFOUS_T to produce an ACH file. You may have to use user exits to write header and trailer records. Please read documentation on this program and it is self-explanatory. Locking of Planning Data in Profit Center Accounting 84.How to lock planning data in profit center accounting. In 4.6 b the transaction is S_ALR_87004395 Maintain Versions you can lock versions for each fiscal year

Changes in vendor master 85.Is there a report which shows changes in vendor master data. Not only for one like MK04 or XK04 but for a range like all changes in vendors per ccode. (should be similar to customer master transdaction OV51) You can used report "RFKABL00". In the accounts payable reporting menu this program can be found via: Accounts payable -> Adequacy and documentation -> Master data -> Display of vendor changes (depending on your SAP version of course) Bank Statement Upload 86.How to used the program RFEBKATX? This creates two files STATE.TXT and ITEM.TXT. How are these files imported into SAP?

- 558 -


Version ECC 6.0 Try using program RFEBKA00 to upload the two files. - one is the header file containing the House bank & account information along with the date and the statement number - the other is the item details. 87.What is the difference between company and company code? A company is the organizational unit used in the legal consolidation module to roll up financial statements of several company codes. The Company Code is the smallest organizational ! unit for which a complete self-contained set of accounts can be drawn up for purposes of external reporting. 88.How many chart of accounts can be attached to a company code? One or more Operative Chart of Accounts can be assigned to a company code. A COA must be aasigned to a company code. This COA is the operative COA and is used in both FI and CO. One Chart of Account can be assigned to many Company codes i.e., Multiple company codes can either share the same or have separate COA. But a company code (Country specific Company code or International Company code) can have a country specific COA also along with Operative COA. The link between the regular COA and the country COA appears in the alternate number field of the G/L master record. Eg: If a company's subdidiaries are located in both US & Mexico. We need to configure 2 Company codes - one for US and another for Mexico,for eg U100 and M100. The same way we create 2 COA's one for US & one for Mexico, USCA and MXCA. Mexico has different govt reporting requirements than the US so we will need to define a company code specific to Country Mexico and also create a country specific COA to be used, in addition to normal COA. In tcode OBY6 (Comp Code Global Parameters) of CC M100 we define normal COA i.e.,USCA in Chart of Accounts field and MXCA in Country Chart/Accts field. 89.What are substitutions and validations? What is the precedent? Validations are used to check settings and return a message if the prerequisite check condition is met. Substitutions are similar to validations; they actually replace and fill in field values behind the scenes without the user's knowledge unlike validations that create on-screen msgs to the user. 90.What is a controlling area? The Controlling Area is the central organizational unit within CO module. It is representative of a contained Cost Accounting envt where costs and revenues can be managed. 91.Define relationship between controlling area and company code? A controlling area may include one or more company codes which must use the same operative chart of accounts as the controlling area. A Controlling Area can contain multiple company code assignments but a single company code can be assigned to only one controlling area. 92.What is a fiscal year variant? Fiscal Year is a period of 12 months and SAP provides 4 special periods to posting adjustment Entries. Fiscal year determines posting periods. Posting periods are used to assign business transactions. Fiscal year may be year dependent or year independent. 93.What are special periods used for?

- 559 -


Version ECC 6.0 The Special periods in a fiscal year variant can be used for things like posting audit or tax adjustments to a closed fiscal year. 94.What do you mean by year dependent in fiscal year variants? Year Dependent: the financial year is same as calendar year. Starting from 1st Jan to 31st Dec (where posting periods and the calendar months are equal) Year Independent: the financial year is different from calendar year Starting from 1st April to 31st March (where the posting period months are not equal to calendar year months) 95.What are shortened fiscal year? When are they used? Shortened Fiscal Year: a financial year, which has less than 12 periods. 96.What are posting periods? The Posting period variant controls which posting periods, both normal and special, are open for each company code. It is possible to have a different posting period variant for each company code in the organization. The posting period is independent of the fiscal year variant. 97.What are document types and what are they used for? Document type is the identifier of differentt account transactions like SA for G/L,AA for Asset Accounting etc.The doc. Types controls things like type of the account that can be posted to, the number range assigned to it, and required doc header fields. 98.How are tolerance group for employees used? Tolerance group stores Posting amount defaults. Tolerance groups are assigned to User ID's that ensures only authorized persons can make postings. 99.What are posting keys? State the purpose of defining posting keys? Posting keys determine whether a line item entry is a debit or a credit as well as the possible field status for the transaction. Posting keys are SAP delivered. If u want changes like making additional fields optional on payment type posting keys then the best possible action is to copy the posting key that needs to be modified and then modify it. 100.What are field status groups? Field status groups control the additional account assignments and other fields that can be posted at the line item level for a G/L account.

- 560 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 561 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 562 -


Version ECC 6.0 General settings Countries T005

Countries

Currency TCURC TCURR TCURT TCURX

Currency codes Wisselkoersen Currency name Decimal places for currencies.

Unit of measure T006

Units of measure

Calendar functions T247 TFACD T015M TTZZ TTZD TTZDF TTZDV TTZDT TTZ5 TTZ5S

Month names Factory calendar definition Month names Time zones Summer time rules Summer time rules (fixed annual dates) Summer time rules (variable dates) Summer time rules texts Assign Time Tones to Countries Assign time zones to regions

Enterprise structure Definition FI T880 T001 CO TKA01 LO T001W T499S TSPA SD TVKO TVTW TVBUR TVKBT TVKGR TVGRT T171T MM T001L T024E T3001 TVST TVLA TTDS

Company Company code Controlling area Plant / sales organization Locations Division Sales organization / company code Distribution channel Sales office Sales office text Sales group Sales group text Sales district text Storage locations Purchasing organization Warehouse number Shipping point Loading point Transportation

Assignment CO TKA02 LO T001K

Assign company code to controlling area Assign plant (valuation area) to company code

SD TVKO TVKOV TVKOS

Sales organization / company code Distribution channel / sales organization Division to sales organization

- 563 -


Version ECC 6.0 TVTA TVKBZ TVBVK TVKWZ MM T024E T024W T001K TVSWZ T320

Sales aria Sales office to sales area Sales group to sales office Plants to sales organization Purchasing organization / company code Plant to Purchase organization Link plant ( = valuation area) / company code Shipping point to plant Assignment MM Storage Location to WM Warehouse

Financial accounting Company code T004 T077S T009 T880 T014

Chart of accounts Account group (g/l accounts) Fiscal year variants Global company data Credit control area

Fi document T010O T010P T001B T003 T012

Posting period variant Posting Period Variant Names Permitted Posting Periods Document types House banks

Not categorized T007a T134 T179 T179T TJ02T TINC TVFK T390

Tax keys Material types Materials: Product Hierarchies Materials: Product hierarchies: Texts Status text Customer incoterms Billing doc types PM: Shop papers for print control

Material master : MARA MAKT MARC MVKE MARD MSKA MSPR MARM MEAN PGMI PROP MAPR MBEW MVER MLGN MLGT MPRP MDTB MDKP

Material master Material text Material per plant / stock Material master, sales data Storage location / stock Sales order stock Project stock Units of measure International article number Planning material Forecast parameters Link MARC <=> PROP Material valuation Material consumption Material / Warehouse number Material / Storage type Forecast profiles MRP table Header data for MRP document

- 564 -


Version ECC 6.0 MLAN MTQSS Basic data text (sap script) STXB STXH STXL

Tax data material master Material master view: QM SAPscript: Texts in non-SAPscript format STXD SAPscript text file header STXD SAPscript text file lines

Batches MCHA MCH1 MCHB Customer master data KNA1 KNB1 KNVV KNBK KNVH KNVP KNVS KNVK KNVI

Batches Batches Stock : batches

Customer master Customer / company Customer sales data Bank details Customer hierarchy Customer partners Shipment data for customer Contact persons Customer master tax indicator

Vendor LFA1 LFB1 LFB5 LFM1 LFM2 LFBK

Vendor master Vendor per company code Vendor dunning data Purchasing organisation data Purchasing data Bank details

Customer – material info record KNMT

Customer material info record

Bank data BNKA

Master bank data

Master data SKA1 BNKA

Accounts Bank master record

Accounting documents // indices BKPF BSEG BSID BSIK BSIM BSIP BSIS BSAD BSAK BSAS

Accounting documents item level Accounting: Secondary index for customers Accounting: Secondary index for vendors Secondary Index, Documents for Material Index for vendor validation of double documents Accounting: Secondary index for G/L accounts Accounting: Index for customers (cleared items) Accounting: Index for vendors (cleared items) Accounting: Index for G/L accounts (cleared items)

- 565 -


Version ECC 6.0 Payment run REGUH REGUP

Settlement data from payment program Processed items from payment program

CO : TKA01 TKA02 KEKO KEPH KALO KANZ

Controlling areas Controlling area assignment Product-costing header Cost components for cost of goods manuf. Costing objects Sales order items - costing objects

Cost center master data CSKS CSKT CRCO

Cost Center Master Data Cost center texts Assignment of Work Center to Cost Center

Cost center accounting COSP COEP . COBK COST

CO Object: Cost Totals for External Postings CO Object: Line Items (by Period) CO Object: Document header CO Object: Price Totals

Sales and Distribution (SD) :

VBFA VTFA

Document flow (alg.) Flow shipping documents

Sales order : VBAK VBAP VBPA VBKD VBEP

Header data Item data Partners in sales order Sales district data Data related to line items, delivery lines

Billing document : VBRK VBRP

header data Item data

Shipping : VTTK VTTP VTTS VTSP VTPA VEKP VEPO

Shipment header Shipment item Stage in transport Stage in transport per shipment item Shipment partners Handling Unit - Header Table Packing: Handling Unit Item (Contents)

Delivery : LIKP LIPS

Delivery header Delivery item

- 566 -


Version ECC 6.0 Pricing : KONH KONP KONV KOND contracts : VEDA

Conditions header Conditions items Procedure ( billing doc or sales order)

Contract data

Material Management (MM) : Material document MKPF MSEG

material document material document (item level)

Purchasing EKKO EKPO EKPV EKET VETVG EKES EKKN EKAN EKPA EIPO EINA EINE EORD EBAN EBKN

Purchase document Purchase document (item level) Shipping-Specific Data on Stock Tfr. for Purch. Doc. Item Delivery schedule Delivery Due Index for Stock Transfer Order Acceptance/Fulfillment Confirmations Account assignment in purchasing Vendor address purchasing Partner functions Item export / import data Purchase info record (main data) Purchase info record (organisational data) Source list Purchase requisition Purchase Requisition Account Assignment

- 567 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 568 -


Version ECC 6.0

- 569 -

FI Material 2 NEW

Recommend Documents